JP6310432B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which a gaming machine and a testing machine are connected so that a test signal can be transmitted from the gaming machine to the testing machine.

  In a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine is known in which main control means and sub-control means are provided, and a test signal related to a stop execution position signal is transmitted from the sub-control means to the testing machine (for example, Patent Document 1). reference).

JP, 2014-100410, A

However, in the conventional technique, since a test signal is transmitted from the sub-control means, there has been a question as to whether the accuracy (transparency) of the ball-out test can be sufficiently secured.
The problem to be solved by the present invention is to be able to transmit a test signal that can sufficiently ensure the accuracy (transparency) of the ball exit test.

The present invention solves the above problems by the following means. The configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses.
The invention of claim 1
A gaming machine comprising main control means (main control board 60) having storage means (ROM 62) in which a program is stored,
The storage means is at least
A lottery program to get lottery results;
Stores a test signal program for outputting test signals, and
As a result obtained by executing the lottery program, a first specific lottery result (for example, a small combination A1 of a winning and replay condition device number “23”) and a second specific lottery result (for example, a winning and replay condition device number “ 24 ”and a special lottery result (for example, an accessory condition device number“ 1 ”) including at least a winning of a special role (1BB) that can carry the winning information to the next game,
In the game that is the result of the first specific lottery, the symbol combination that can give a predetermined profit (9 medals) when the stop switch is operated in the first push order (for example, the left middle right push order) When the stop switch is operated in the second push order (for example, left-right middle push order), the symbol combination capable of giving the predetermined profit is not stopped and displayed.
In the game that is the result of the second specific lottery, when the stop switch is operated in the second push order, the symbol combination that can give the predetermined profit can be stopped and displayed, and the stop switch is turned on in the first push order. When it is operated, the symbol combination that can give the predetermined profit is not stopped and displayed.
The first specific lottery result under conditions that do not carry over the winning information special combinations and Do Ri becomes satisfies the condition for notifying the operation mode of the stop switch (in step S242 of FIG. 55 as "Yes" (press order instruction In the game , by executing the test signal program, the first push order information and the information indicating that the operation timing of the stop switch is arbitrary (for example, “1, 127, 127, 127”) Can be executed (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting
In a game that satisfies the condition for notifying the operation mode of the stop switch in a situation in which the special combination winning information is not carried over, the second specific lottery result is obtained. By executing the test signal program, the second push order information And a process for outputting information indicating that the operation timing of the stop switch indicates an arbitrary operation timing (for example, “2, 127, 127, 127”),
The result is the first specific lottery result in a situation where the special role winning information is not carried over, and the condition for notifying the operation mode of the stop switch is not satisfied (“No” in step S242 of FIG. 55) In the game, by executing the test signal program, the third push order information and information indicating that the operation timing of the stop switch indicates the optimal operation timing for each reel ("0, 3, 12, 8") )) Can be executed,
In a game that does not satisfy the condition for notifying the operation mode of the stop switch in the situation where the winning information of the special role is not carried over, the second specific lottery result is obtained. It is possible to execute a process for outputting information and information indicating the operation timing of the stop switch indicating the optimum operation timing for each reel.

  According to the present invention, an appropriate test signal (symbol stop signal) can be transmitted directly from the main control means depending on whether or not the special role is won and the lottery result in the game. A test signal that sufficiently ensures (transparency) can be transmitted.

It is a block diagram which shows the outline of control of the slot machine in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the storage capacity of RWM and ROM of this embodiment. It is a top view which shows the storage number display LED, the acquisition number display LED, and the status display LED in more detail. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the digits 1-5 and the segments AP. It is a figure which shows a LED display request flag and a LED display request counter. It is a figure which shows the details of LED segment table 1 and 2, and segment data. It is a figure which shows the data and address of LED segment table 1 and 2. It is a figure which shows the input ports 0-2 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the output ports 0-2 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the output ports 3-5 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the output ports 7-10 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows some data (medal management flag etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows the one part data (LED number display LED signal data etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows some data (LED display request counter etc.) of the memory area of RWM. It is a figure which shows some data (the number of acquirable numbers etc. at the time of 1BB operation | movement) of the memory area of RWM. It is a figure which shows some data (winning and replay condition apparatus information etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a figure which shows the display window (transparent window) provided in the slot machine, the positional relationship of each reel, an effective line, etc. It is a figure (1) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payout, and a symbol. It is a figure (2) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payout, and a symbol. It is a figure (3) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payout, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (4) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payout, and a symbol. It is a figure (5) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payout, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (6) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payout, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (7) which shows the combination of the kind of winning combination, the number of payout, and a symbol. It is a figure (8) which shows the combination of the kind of winning combination, the number of payout, and a symbol. It is a figure (1) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure (2) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure (3) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure (4) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure (5) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure which shows a winning and replay condition apparatus and its winning probability. It is a figure which shows AT lottery table. It is a figure which shows a pushing order instruction | indication number table, its data, and an address. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a pushing order instruction number and an advantageous pushing order. It is a figure which shows a production group number table, its data, and an address. It is a figure explaining transfer of RT. It is a figure explaining transition of the main game state. It is a flowchart which shows a program start process (M_PRG_START). It is a flowchart which shows a power supply return process (M_POWER_ON). It is a flowchart which shows a main process (M_MAIN) process. It is a flowchart which shows a game start set (MS_GAME_SET) process. It is a figure which shows the command transmission table 1, its data, and an address. It is a figure which shows the command transmission table 2, its data, and an address. It is a flowchart which shows a control command continuous set (M_CMD_LIST). It is a flowchart which shows the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). It is a flowchart which shows the control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET). It is a flowchart which shows medal acceptance start (MS_MEDAL_START). It is a flowchart which shows a 2-byte time waiting process (R_2BYTE_WAIT). It is a flowchart which shows interruption waiting (C_INTR_WAIT). It is a flowchart which shows 1 medal addition (MS_MEDAL_INC). It is a flowchart which shows a pushing order instruction number set process (M_ORD_INF). It is a figure which shows the main game state check table, its data, and an address. It is a flowchart which shows production group number set processing (M_ACT_GRP). It is a flowchart which shows a stop symbol signal set process (S_IF2_SET). It is a figure which shows the symbol stop signal table 1, its data, and an address. It is a figure which shows the symbol stop signal table 2, its data, and an address. It is a flowchart which shows a reel rotation start preparation (M_REEL_READY). It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a medal payout number. It is a flowchart which shows medal payout (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning. It is a flowchart which shows a game completion | finish check process (M_GAME_CHK). It is a flowchart which shows 1BB operation | movement management (M_BB_CTL). It is a flowchart which shows RB operation | movement management (M_RB_CTL). It is a flowchart which shows an interrupt process (I_INTR). It is a flowchart which shows LED display control (I_LED_OUT). It is a flowchart which shows a power-off process (IS_POWER_DOWN). It is a flowchart which shows control command transmission (I_CMD_OUT). It is a time chart which shows transmission of a sub control data strobe signal and sub control data signals 1-16. It is a flowchart which shows a test signal and condition apparatus information output process. It is a figure which shows the ON / OFF state of D3 bit (1BB) and D4 bit (RB) in the operation state flag information output as a test signal. It is a figure explaining the example of an output of conditional device information. It is a figure which shows 2nd Embodiment, (A) is a figure which shows the address of RWM, and its content, (B) is a figure which shows a part of flowchart, (C) is a figure in (B), It is a flowchart which shows a control command continuous set (M_CONCMDS_SET).

In the present specification, the meanings of terms are as follows.
“RT” means that the type and number of conditional devices including replays and their winning probabilities are unique game states, and “RT transition” refers to transition from one RT to another RT. This means that the type (number) of condition devices including replay and the winning probability thereof vary. Therefore, the type and number of conditional devices including replays in one RT and the winning probability are values specific to the RT, and the types of conditional devices including replays in one RT and the other RT, The numbers and their winning probabilities are never exactly the same.
In the present embodiment, the RT includes non-RTs, RT1 to RT5 (FIG. 37 described later). “Non-RT” does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to “RT0”. Therefore, in this specification, “RT” includes non-RT.

“Main game state” is a concept different from RT, and is any of so-called normal / AT precursor / AT preparation / AT, non-internal / internal, normal / special game It is the concept which shows.
The main game state of the present embodiment includes main game states 0 to 7 (FIG. 38 to be described later. Details will be described later).
The “main game state” includes “a state related to notification (a state indicating whether notification is performed)”, “a state related to AT (a state indicating whether AT is in progress)”, “special mode”, and the like. Sometimes called.

The “game medium” refers to a medium used for a game, and is a “medal” in the present embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball can be used. In addition to the actual medals, the game media include game media (data related to the game media) that are electrically stored (credit, stored) inside the gaming machine.
“Bet” refers to betting a medal (game medium) to play a game. In the present embodiment, the maximum (limit) number that can be bet is set to “3” regardless of the RT. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and “3” is set for normal games (non-special games), and “2” is set for special games (1BB games, etc.).

  “Reservation” refers to crediting a medal into the slot machine 10, unlike the “bet”. “Storage” may be used to include a bet, but in this specification, “storage” is used to mean that “bet” is not included. In the present embodiment, the maximum (limit) number that can be stored is set to “50” regardless of the gaming state or the like.

“Care” means that a player directly inserts a medal from a medal insertion slot 43 described later.
The “care bet” means that the player bets a medal by cleaning the medal from the medal insertion slot 43.
“Maintenance storage” means that a player stores medals by adding medals from the medal slot 43 (adding credits).
“Bet medal” means a bet medal.
“Reserved medals” refers to medals stored as credits.

The “reserved bet” is a game in which a player operates a bet switch 40, which will be described later, to play a part or all of the medals stored as credits within a possible bet range of the game. To bet.
“Automatic bet” means that when a replay wins, the number of medals bet in the previous game is automatically bet by the internal control processing of the slot machine 10. Note that the maintenance bet medals, the stored bets medals, and the stored medals can be settled thereafter, but the medals that are automatically bet by the replay winning are set so that the settlement cannot be performed.
“Inserting” means betting or storing medals, including the above-described care bets, care storage, storage bets, and automatic bets.
“Checkout” refers to paying out a bet medal and / or a stored medal to a player.

  “Payout” means that a medal is paid out to a player based on a winning combination, or a medal is paid out by the above-described payment. When paying out a medal to a player based on a winning combination of a combination, both storing it as a credit and paying out an actual medal from a payout slot (not shown) are included. The payout in the present embodiment is controlled so that “50” is the limit number and stored in the credit, and medals for which the stored number exceeds “50” are actually paid out to the player.

  It is equivalent that the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment “pays” a medal to a player and that the player “acquires” a medal. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the slot machine 10, “medal payout”, and from the player side, “medal acquisition”. For this reason, for example, as shown in FIG. 19 or the like, there are a case of “payout (number of sheets, etc.)” and a case of “acquisition (number)” as shown in FIG. 3, which have the same meaning.

In the present specification, a numerical value with “B” at the end (in particular, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a numerical value with “H” at the end means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating “16” in a decimal number is expressed as “00010000B” or “00010000 (B)” in a binary number, and “10H” or “10 (H)” in a hexadecimal number. .
However, the end of “B” is omitted for binary numbers other than 8-bit numbers. For example, “0” in a notation such as “register value is“ 0 ”” actually means a binary number of “00000000B”. Therefore, a numerical value without “B” at the end does not always mean that it is not a binary number. Similarly, a numerical value without “H” at the end does not always mean that it is not a hexadecimal number.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 in the present embodiment.
As a typical control board provided in the slot machine 10, a main control board 60 and a sub control board 80 are provided.
The main control board 60 has an input port (0 to 2) and an output port (0 to 10), and includes an RWM (main memory) 61, a ROM 62, a main CPU 63, and the like (meaning only include those illustrated in FIG. 1). is not).

The RWM 61 is a storage medium that can store (update) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game.
The ROM 62 is a storage medium that stores programs necessary for the progress of the game, various data (for example, a data table), and the like.
The main CPU 63 refers to a CPU provided on the main control board 60, and executes programs and calculations necessary for the progress of the game. Specifically, the lottery of the combination, the drive control of the reel 31, and the winning Execute paying out.
The main CPU 63 contains a register. Particularly in this embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of registers (for example, an A register to an L register, a transmission register, and the like) are provided.

An MPU including an RWM 61, a ROM 62, a main CPU 63 and a register is mounted on the main control board 60. Note that the ROM 62 may be provided externally in addition to what is mounted inside the MPU. On the other hand, the RWM 61 is provided only in the MPU according to current rules.
On the other hand, an MPU including an RWM 81, a ROM 82, and a main CPU 83 is mounted on a sub control board 80 described later, and the RWM 61 is provided outside and outside the MPU.

FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining storage areas and storage capacities of the RWM 61 and the ROM 62 mounted on the main control means 60. Note that the present invention is not limited to the capacity and area shown in FIG.
The storage capacity of the RWM 61 is “1,024 KB” in the present embodiment, and has a used area with a capacity “512 KB” and an unused area with a capacity “512 KB”. Data (FIGS. 12 to 16) described later and the like are stored in the use area.
In addition, the storage capacity of the ROM 62 is “16 KB” in the present embodiment, and has a use area having a capacity “7.5 KB” and a use area outside the capacity “8.5 KB”. Further, the use area includes a program area having a capacity “4.5 KB” and a data area having a capacity “3.0 KB”.

Here, the “use area” refers to a storage area in which information other than information necessary for preventing unauthorized modification or other changes is stored or stored (the same applies to the RWM 61 and the ROM 62).
In addition, the “data area” refers to a storage area in which only information other than the program is stored in the use area, or data used when the program is executed is stored.

The “program area” refers to a storage area other than the data area in the use area, and stores various programs (FIG. 39 and the like to be described later) executed by the main control means 60. The program area may be referred to as a “control area”.
Further, outside the use area is referred to as a second program area in the present embodiment. In the second program area, other programs not related to the progress of the game (for example, a program used during the test) are stored. This point will be described later. Further, when the area outside the use area of the ROM 62 is referred to as a second program area, the program area in the use area may be referred to as a first program area.

  In FIG. 1, a main control board 60 and a peripheral device for game progress including operation switches such as the bet switch 40 shown in FIG. 1 are electrically connected via an input port or an output port. The input port is a connection unit to which signals such as operation switches are input, and the output port is a connection unit that transmits signals to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.

In FIG. 1, an input peripheral device is indicated by an arrow from the peripheral device to the main control board 60, and an output peripheral device is an arrow from the main control board 60 to the peripheral device. It is shown (the same applies to the sub-control board 80).
The push button 25 (also referred to as a “push button unit”) connected to the sub control board 80 can transmit and receive signals in both directions. Specifically, a signal indicating that the operation has been performed is transmitted to the sub control board 80 based on the operation of the push button 25, and the lamp provided on the push button 25 is caused to emit light from the sub control board 80.

  In addition, as a timing at which the push button 25 is caused to emit light, a specific effect that can switch the effect that is currently being output or a game that can display the history information related to the game (the total number of executions of the normal game, the number of executions of the AT, etc.) After the operation of the start switch 41 when the signal is output, after the first stop operation of the reel 31, and the like. At this time, it is conceivable that the emission color is “white” during the game standby, and white, blue, red, etc. during the game, depending on the expected degree of winning the AT.

In FIG. 1, medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 are configured to pass a medal selector.
As shown in FIG. 1, the medal selector includes a passage sensor 43a, a blocker 45, and insertion sensors 44a and 44b (but not limited thereto), and is electrically connected to the main control board 60. .
When a medal is inserted from the medal slot 43, the passage sensor 43a first detects the medal.

  Further, a blocker 45 is provided on the downstream side of the passage sensor 43a. The blocker 45 is for permitting / disallowing the insertion of medals, and forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 from the payout slot when the insertion of medals is not permitted. To do. On the other hand, when the medal insertion is permitted, a medal passage for guiding the medal inserted from the medal insertion port 43 to the hopper 35a is formed.

  Here, the blocker 45 is in a state where the insertion of medals is not permitted during the game (from the start of the rotation of the reels 31 until all the reels 31 are stopped and the payout corresponding to the winning combination is completed at the time of winning the winning combination). To do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when a game is not being performed.

  On the further downstream side of the blocker 45, input sensors 44a and 44b (optical sensors) are provided. Therefore, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 are further detected by the insertion sensors 44a (upstream side) and 44b (downstream side) after being detected by the passage sensor 43a. As shown in FIG. 1, in the following description, the upstream closing sensor 44a may be referred to as the closing sensor 1 and the downstream closing sensor 44b may be referred to as the closing sensor 2.

As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 60 includes a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and a checkout switch 46 as operation switches operated by the player. Connected.
The bet switch 40 (40a or 40b) is a switch operated by the player when betting a stored medal for the game. In the present embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number) medals are provided.
In addition to this, a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

The start switch 41 is a switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of left, middle and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, and right) reels 31 and are operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are stopped.
Further, the settlement switch 46 is a switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) medals stored (credited) in the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display substrate 70 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 60. In practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 60 and the display board 70, and the main control board 60 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 70 are connected. In FIG. 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. Thus, the main control board 60 and the display board 70 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected (via a harness or the like), but may be connected via another separate board (a relay board or the like). For example, one or more other boards (such as relay boards) may be interposed between the main control board 60 and the sub control board 80.

  A storage number display LED 71, an acquisition number display LED 72, and a status display LED 73 are connected to the display substrate 70. These LEDs 71 to 73 are provided in the vicinity of an operation switch operated by the player, and are provided at a position where the player can always visually recognize them. It is not necessary that all the LEDs 71 to 73 are provided on one display substrate 70. For example, a plurality of display substrates 70 such as display substrates 70A, 70B,. Any of the LEDs 71 to 73 may be provided.

FIG. 3 is a plan view showing the storage number display LED 71, the acquisition number display LED 72, and the status display LED 73 in more detail.
In FIG. 3, a display substrate 70 (shown by a dotted line in FIG. 3) is disposed in the slot machine 10 below the storage number display LED 71, the acquired number display LED 72, and the status display LED 73.

The storage number display LED 71 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored in the slot machine 10 and includes a digit 1 that displays an upper digit and a digit 2 that displays a lower digit. That is, the storage number display LED 71 displays two digits.
Here, “digit” means a display unit (display), and in the present embodiment, it is composed of a seven segment display (seven segment display unit, so-called 7-segment).
As shown in FIG. 3, the number of digits mounted on the display board 70 is four digits 1 to 4, but in this embodiment, there are five digits, and the other digit 5 is the main digit. This corresponds to the set value display LED 64 (FIG. 1) provided on the control board 60.

The storage number display LED 71 displays the number of stored medals, and in this embodiment, displays a number between “00” and “50” (integer).
For example, in a state where no medals are bet and stored, the display of the storage number display LED 71 is “00”. Here, when one medal is maintained, the one medal is bet for the game. When two more cards are additionally inserted, three medals are bet for the game (when the bet limit number is three). Therefore, when up to three medals are maintained, the medals are bet and not stored. As medals continue to be maintained, medals are stored in the slot machine 10 and the number of stored medals is displayed by the stored number display LED 71.

  In this embodiment, up to 50 medals can be stored. Therefore, when the number of stored sheets reaches 50 (when “50” is displayed on the stored number display LED 71), medals are not stored any more. In this state, if a medal is maintained from the medal insertion slot 43, the maintained medal is returned from the payout slot by the blocker 45.

  Here, when a winning combination (excluding replay) is awarded and a medal corresponding to the winning combination is paid out, the slot machine 10 has priority over actually paying out a medal from the payout slot. Medals are stored. For example, in the case where the stored number before winning a winning combination is “10”, when the nine winning combination is won, the display of the storing number display LED 71 is updated from “10” to “19”.

  Furthermore, when the winning number of the winning combination exceeds “50”, the portion exceeding “50” is actually paid out from the payout opening. For example, when the number of reserved coins is “47” before winning a winning combination and nine medals are paid out for winning nine winning combinations, three are stored and the number of storing is “50”, which exceeds “50”. Six cards are paid out from the payout slot.

  Further, at the time of replay winning, medals are not stored and paid out, and the number of medals bet in the game are automatically bet for replay. For example, when the game is played with 3 bets (3 cards) and a replay is won, 3 medals are automatically bet. Since the automatic bet based on the replay winning is the insertion of medals for replaying, even if the settlement (return) operation is performed thereafter, the medals cannot be settled.

  According to the “Rules for Game Machine Approval and Type Approval, etc.”, if the combination of symbols corresponding to replay is stopped on the active line, it is the operation of the condition device related to replay and not “winning” Interpreted. However, in the present application (this specification and the like), replay is also treated as one of the roles (replaying game), and the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay is stopped on the active line is referred to as “replay winning”.

The number-of-acquisition display LED 72 is an LED that displays the number of payouts (the number of players acquired) when winning a winning combination, and is composed of a digit 3 for displaying an upper digit and a digit 4 for displaying a lower digit. Yes. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 72 displays two digits, like the storage number display LED 71.
The acquisition number display LED 72 is “00” when there are no medals to be paid out. For example, when nine medals to be described later win a prize and nine medals are paid out, the display of the acquisition number display LED 72 is: From “00” to “09”.
The acquired number display LED 72 may be controlled to be turned off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit (digit 3) may be turned off and only the lower digit (digit 4) may be displayed as “0”.

The acquisition number display LED 72 normally displays the acquisition number, but functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error when an error occurs.
Furthermore, the number-of-acquisition display LED 72 is a push order that is advantageous to the player during an AT game or the like (a push order for stopping the high eye on the active line when the winning mode of the winning combination has high and low eyes). In addition, it functions as an LED that displays information (push order instruction information) of the intended RT on the slot machine 10 side, including the push order for shifting to (inducing) the main game state (the same applies hereinafter). Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 72 in the present embodiment is an LED that also serves to display the acquisition number, error contents, and push order instruction information. Note that an advantageous push order notification is also executed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

Here, in this specification, the display of the push order using the acquisition number display LED 72 by the main control board 60 is referred to as “display of the push order instruction information”, and the display of the push order by the sub control board 80 is “the push order display”. This is called “notification”.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 to be described later, a number corresponding to an advantageous pressing order is referred to as a “pressing order instruction number”.
Furthermore, data stored in the address “F00E”, for example, data such as “102” as shown in step S220 of FIG. 52 described later is referred to as “push order instruction data”.

Furthermore, it is executed in step S645 of FIG. 65 to be described later, and is the push order displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72 shown in FIG. 3, for example, “= 2” when the push order instruction data is “102”. This is referred to as “push order instruction information”.
As described above, the value stored in the ROM 62 (FIG. 34; “0” to “9”) is referred to as “push order instruction number”, and data stored in the address “F00E” (“101H” to “109H”). )) Is referred to as “push order instruction data”, and information (“= 1” to “= 9”) displayed on the acquired number display LED 72 is referred to as “push order instruction information”.

In FIG. 3, the status display LED 73 is composed of seven LEDs (73a to 73g).
The replay display LED 73a is an LED that is turned on when a replay is won, and when an automatic bet is made based on the replay win, the replay display LED 73a is turned on to notify the player that the player is in an automatic bet state.

The insertable display LED 73b is an LED that lights up when a medal can be inserted. That is, it lights up before the game is finished and a medal for shifting to the next game is inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. In the present embodiment, even after the replay is activated, it lights up when a bet can be made according to the number of stored items.
In the present embodiment, the settlement display LED 73c is an LED that is lit during the settlement process. When the settlement switch 46 is turned on in a state where there is a stored medal and / or a bet medal (excluding an automatic bet at the time of replay winning), the light is lit while the medal is actually paid out.

  The game start LED 73d is an LED that lights up when a medal is inserted and the start switch 41 becomes operable. Therefore, it does not light up when no medal is bet (or when replay is not automatically inserted).

  The (1 piece, 2 pieces, 3 pieces) insertion display LEDs 73e to 73g are LEDs for displaying the number of medals bet, respectively. When one medal is bet, “1 BET (1 piece insertion display LED 73e) is displayed. ) ”Is lit and when two medals are bet,“ 1 BET (one-sheet insertion display LED 73e) ”and“ 2 BET (two-sheet insertion display LED 73f) ”are lit and three medals are betted. At this time, “1 BET (1 sheet insertion display LED 73e)”, “2 BET (2 sheet insertion display LED 73f)” and “3 BET (3 sheet insertion display LED 73g)” are lit.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship between the digits 1 to 5 and the segments AP.
Each digit is composed of segments A to P (a total of 8), and the segments A to G (7) of them constitute a so-called 7 segment. Further, the segment P constitutes any one of the status display LEDs 73 (excluding the digit 2).

As shown in FIG. 4, for example, in the digit 1, the segments A to G constitute the upper digit 7-segment of the stored number display LED 71, and the segment P constitutes the game start LED 73 d.
In FIG. 4, among the digits 3, segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the upper digits of the acquired number display LED 72, and a segment P constitutes a throw-in display LED 73 b.

Similarly, in FIG. 4, among the digits 4, the segments A to G constitute the lower 7 digits of the acquisition number display LED 72, and the segment P constitutes the replay display LED 73 a.
In FIG. 4, segments A to G of digit 5 constitute 7 segments of set value display LED 64, and segment P constitutes settlement display LED 73 c.

  From the above, for example, when all the segments (segments A to P) of the digit 1 are turned on, the storage number display LED 71 (upper digit) displays “8” and the segment P by turning on the segments A to G. The game start LED 73d is lit in the status display LED 73 by turning on.

FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an LED display request flag (_FL_SEG_DSP) and an LED display request counter (_CT_SEG_DSP).
The LED display request flag is a flag indicating which LED can be turned on, and is stored in a predetermined area (“F010” in FIG. 14 described later) of the RWM 61 as 1-byte data including 8 bits (D0 to D7). The
For example, when the LED display request flag can display the digits 1 and 2, that is, the upper and lower digits of the stored number display LED 71, the D0 and D1 bits are “1”, and other digits cannot be displayed. Then, the other bits become “0”. Therefore, the data of the LED display request flag in this case is “00000011B”.

As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, during normal times (during gaming and waiting for gaming), digit 5 (set value display LED 64) is turned off and digits 1 to 4 are turned on. Therefore, the normal LED display request flag is “00001111B”.
While the setting is being changed, the set value is displayed in the digit 5, so that the D4 bit becomes “1”, and the digits 1 and 2 (reserved number display LED 71) are not displayed and become “0”, and the digits 3 and 4 ( The acquired number display LED 72) becomes “1” in order to display “-”. Therefore, the LED display request flag during the setting change is “00011100B”.

  Furthermore, during the setting confirmation, the setting value is displayed in the digit 5 as in the case of changing the setting, so the D4 bit becomes “1”. Further, the digits 1 to 4 are the same as in normal times. Therefore, the LED display request flag during setting confirmation is “00011111B”.

The LED display request flag is a flag whose value varies depending on whether it is normal, setting change, or setting confirmation.
On the other hand, the LED display request counter is 1-byte data consisting of 8 bits (D0 to D7) like the LED display request flag, and data whose value is updated every timer interrupt (2.235 ms) described later. It is. Further, the LED display request counter is stored in a predetermined area (“F00F” in FIG. 14 described later) of the RWM 61, similarly to the LED display request flag.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED display request counter takes “00010000B” as an initial value, and an on (“1”) digit is shifted to the right by one digit every time an interrupt is processed (executes a shift instruction). ) So that it is updated. When the value of the LED display request counter is “00000001B”, it becomes “00000000B” at the next interruption, but when it becomes “0” after the update, the initial value is again “0” at the interruption. 00010000B ". Note that the initial value “00010000B” may be set at the next interrupt when all bits become “0”.
Also, the assignment of digits to each bit of the LED display request flag and LED display request counter shown in FIG. 5 is not limited to that shown in FIG. For example, D0 to D2 can be unused and D3 to D7 can be assigned to each digit.

Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, as a result of performing an AND operation on the LED display request flag and the LED display request counter, a digit “1” is a lighting target at the time of the interrupt processing.
As will be described later, when the error content (number) when an error that cannot be recovered (an error that cannot be recovered unless the power is turned off and the power is turned on again) occurs in the slot machine 10 is displayed on the LED The display request flag and the LED display request counter are not referred to.
On the other hand, in the case of a recoverable error (an error that can be recovered without turning on / off the power), the result of “AND” operation of the LED display request flag and the LED display request counter as in the normal state is “1”. LED which is “” is a lighting target.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an LED segment table and the like stored in the ROM 62. The LED segment table is a table for storing display data when the digits 1 to 5 are turned on, and LED segment table 1 ((A) in the figure) for storing alphabetic display data (used for error display, etc.) LED segment table 2 ((B) in the figure) that stores data for displaying “=” when displaying numeric display data and push order instruction information.
In the figure, (C) shows the relationship between 1-byte data and the corresponding segment.
In FIG. 6, “DEFB” refers to storing 1 byte (8 bits) data in the assembler language. Note that “DEFW” to be described later refers to storing 2-byte data in the assembler language.

As shown in FIG. 6, for example, “C” display data is “00111001 (B)”. That is, the segments A, D, E, and F are “1 (on; lit)”, and the segments B, C, G, and P are “0 (off, unlit)”. Therefore, in FIG. 4, when the segments A, D, E, and F are turned on, “C” by 7 segments is displayed.
For example, the display data “=” is “01001000 (B)”. That is, in FIG. 4, the segments D and G are “1 (ON; lit)”, the center and lower horizontal segments are lit, and “=” by 7 segments is displayed.

Each data of the LED segment tables 1 and 2 shown in FIG. 6 is stored in the data area of the ROM 62 in the order of addresses.
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the data of the LED segment tables 1 and 2 in the data area of the ROM 61. In this embodiment, the head address is set to “1811”, and the data of the LED segment table 1 is stored in order from “1811”. Similarly, for the data of the LED segment table 2, the head address is set to “1816”, and the data of the LED segment table 2 is stored in order from “1816”.

Thereby, each data of the LED segment table 1 can be represented by an offset value from the head address “1811”. Similarly, each data in the LED segment table 2 can be represented by an offset value from the head address “1816”.
For example, when reading the data of the LED segment data table 2, when the head address “1816” is designated and the content to be displayed is “5”, the address obtained by adding the offset value “5” to the head address “1816” That is, if the data “181B” is read, the display data “5” can be read.

Returning to FIG.
The main control board 60 is electrically connected to the motor 32 of the symbol display device 30 and the like.
The symbol display device 30 includes a reel 31 (three in this embodiment) that displays symbols, a motor 32 that drives each reel 31, and a reel sensor 39 that detects the position of the reel 31.

  The motor 32 is for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control means 63 g described later. Here, the reel 31 includes a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 that is operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination) is attached is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof. The specific arrangement of symbols on the reel 31 will be described later.
Each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) index. The index is provided in a convex shape on, for example, the circumferential side surface of the reel 31 and is used when detecting whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether it has rotated one time, or the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 39. The signal of the reel sensor 39 is electrically connected to the main control board 60. When the index detects (cuts) the in-reel sensor 39, the input signal is input to the main control board 60, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

  Further, a symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 39 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 62 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected can be detected.

  The medal payout device 35 is electrically connected to the main control board 60. The medal payout device 35 is a hopper 35a for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when paying out medals of the hopper 35a from the payout port, and a medal paid out from the hopper motor 36. Dispensing sensors 37a and 37b are provided.

The medals that are maintained and received from the medal slot 43 are formed so as to be accommodated in the hopper 35a through a predetermined passage (also referred to as “chute portion”).
The payout sensors 37a and 37b are provided with a payout sensor 37a on the upstream side and a payout sensor 37b on the downstream side, similarly to the input sensors 44a and 44b.
As shown in FIG. 1, in the following description, the upstream payout sensor 37a may be referred to as the payout sensor 1, and the downstream payout sensor 37b may be referred to as the payout sensor 2.

  The payout sensors 37a and 37b are arranged at a predetermined distance, and are configured to be detected by the payout sensor 37b after a predetermined time has elapsed since the medal was detected by the payout sensor 37a. Then, based on the timing when the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on / off, it is determined whether or not the medals have been paid out correctly.

For example, when the signals of the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both off despite the hopper motor 36 being driven, it is determined that no medal has been paid out, and a hopper error (no medal) is detected. Is done.
On the other hand, when at least one of the signals from the payout sensor 37a or 37b remains on, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred. Note that only one payout sensor 37 may be provided to detect the error.
The full sensor 38 is a sensor that detects the fullness of the sub tank 35b that accommodates medals overflowing from the hopper 35a, and is configured by a circuit that energizes when the medals come into contact when the medals in the sub tank 35b become full.

The door switch 16 is a switch that is turned on when a front cover (not shown) of the slot machine 10 is opened, and detects the open / closed state of the front cover.
The power switch 51 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the slot machine 10.
The setting key switch 52 is a switch that is turned on when a setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion slot and is rotated 90 degrees to the right, and is turned on when confirming the setting or changing the setting.

The setting change / reset switch 53 is a switch that serves as both a setting change switch and a reset switch. Note that the setting change switch and the reset switch may be provided separately.
The setting change / reset switch 53 is operated when changing a setting value. When the power switch 51 is turned on while the setting key switch 52 is turned on, reset, that is, initialization processing is performed, and predetermined data stored in the RWM 61 is cleared.

  The setting door switch 54 is a switch that detects opening and closing of a door (not shown) that covers the setting key switch 52 and the setting change / reset switch 53. For example, an error occurs when the setting door switch 54 is off, that is, when the setting key switch 52 is on while the setting door is not opened.

FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating the input ports 0 to 2 provided on the main control board 60. 9 to 11 are diagrams showing output ports 0 to 5 and 7 to 10 provided on the main control board 60. FIG. In actuality, the slot machine 10 is also provided with the output port 6, but it is not directly related to the present embodiment, and is not shown.
In this embodiment, the input ports 0 to 2 and the output ports 0 to 10 are 1-byte ports to which 8 bits D0 to D7 can be input or output.
Although the input port and the output port are provided in addition to the above, description thereof is omitted in this embodiment.

  In FIGS. 8 to 10, a port indicated as unused means a signal input / output port that is not actually used or a description of which is omitted in the present embodiment (a port without signal input / output). Does not mean all unused).

  In FIG. 8, the input port 0 is supplied with signals of a settlement switch 46, a bet switch 40 (a 1-bet switch 40a and a 3-bet switch 40b), a start switch 41, and a stop switch 42, which are operation switches. In the example of FIG. 8, the 1-bet switch signal (D1 bit) and the 3-bet switch signal (D2 bit) are separated, but when the slot machine 10 has a specification in which only the 3-bet switch 40 is provided, The D1 bit of input port 0 is unused.

The input port 1 receives signals from the passage sensor 43a, the door switch 16, the setting door switch 54, the setting key switch 52, the setting change / reset switch 53, and the (left, middle, right) reel sensor 39. .
Furthermore, the input port 2 includes a power interruption signal (a signal output when power interruption occurs), a signal from the closing sensors 1 (44a) and 2 (44b), and a dispensing sensor 1 (37a) and 2 (37b). ) Signal and the full sensor 38 signal are input. When the slot machine 10 is not provided with the setting door switch 54, the D2 bit of the input port 1 is not used.

  As will be described later, a main process (FIG. 41; M_MAIN, which will be described later) (also referred to as a main loop) performed once per game is provided as information processing for proceeding with the game. The main process is a process in which inserted medals are detected or a winning process is performed after all reels 31 are stopped.

  During this main process, the main process is temporarily exited and an interrupt process (timer interrupt process) is executed (FIG. 64; I_INTR described later). In the interrupt process, a process of detecting the input ports 0 to 2 (step S607 in FIG. 64) is executed, and after the process is executed, a process of returning to the main process is periodically performed again. The interval of the interrupt time is 2.235 ms in this embodiment. That is, the data of the input ports 0 to 2 is acquired for each interrupt process at intervals of 2.235 ms.

  Based on the acquired data, for each of the input ports 0 to 2, level data (data indicating ON / OFF of each bit), rising data of the input port (when the previous interrupt is off, this interrupt is on) Data indicating which bit the data has become), and falling data of the input port (data indicating which bit is the data that was on at the time of the previous interrupt and turned off at the time of the current interrupt) And remember. Therefore, these data are updated every 2.235 ms.

Also, all D0 to D7 bits of the input ports 0 to 2 are detected regardless of when the interrupt processing is performed. For example, since the player cannot operate the bet switch 40 while the reel 31 is rotating (before the stop switch 42 is operated), the D1 and D2 bit data of the input port 0 are always acquired. Although not necessary, in the present invention, data of all bits is acquired. If all bits of data are acquired, error determination can be performed. For example, the rise data of the bet switch 40 is turned on while the reel 31 is rotating.
For example, if 1 byte data (8 bits) of the input port 0 is acquired, it is possible to know the on / off status of all the operation switches.

  In the output port 0 of FIG. 9, the φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 32 of the left reel 31 are output from the D0 to D3 bits. The motor 32 of this embodiment is configured to rotate the reel 31 by 1-2 phase excitation, and the reel 31 is driven by a combination of four-phase excitations of φ0 to φ3. Are respectively output from predetermined bits.

Further, a signal of the blocker 45 is output from the D6 bit. Furthermore, a drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is output from the D7 bit.
Here, the blocker 45 forms a medal passage connecting the medal insertion port 43 and the hopper 35a when the signal of the blocker is “1” (on), and when it is “0” (off), A passage (return passage) that connects the medal slot 43 and the payout slot is formed.
For example, when the blocker 45 is driven, a blocker signal is output from the D6 bit of the output port 0 by interrupt processing.

From the D0 to D3 bits of the output port 1, the φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 32 of the middle reel 31 are output. Similarly, the φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 32 of the right reel 31 are output from the D4 to D7 bits.
Further, from the D0 to D2 bits of the output port 2, signals for turning on the three-sheet insertion display LED 73g, the two-sheet insertion display LED 73f, and the one-sheet insertion display LED 73e in the status display LED 73 are output. Further, a sub control data strobe signal is output from the D7 bit. Here, the sub control data strobe signal is a signal transmitted to the sub control board 80 together with sub control data signals 1 to 16 described later. When receiving the sub control data strobe signal, the sub control board 80 acquires the data of the sub control data signals 1 to 16 from the buffer provided in the sub control board 80 based on the rising edge of the sub control data strobe signal. To control. Signal transmission timing and the like will be described later (FIG. 68).

  The output port 3 is used for outputting an LED digit signal. The output port 4 is used for outputting an LED segment signal. These LED digit signal and LED segment signal are signals for turning on / off the set value display LED 64, the storage number display LED 71, the acquisition number display LED 72, and the status display LED 73.

Specifically, for example, when the data of the output port 3 is “00000001B”, only the digit 1 is turned on, so only the upper digit of the storage number display LED 71 is turned on. Further, when the data of the output port 4 is “00111111B”, the signals of the segments A to F are turned on, so that “0” is displayed in the digit 1.
As described above, which digit is to be lit at the output port 0 and which segment is to be lit at the output port 1 are determined.

Furthermore, an external (outer end) signal is output from the output port 5 to the external concentration terminal board 100. In this embodiment, external signals 1 to 5, a medal payout signal, and a medal insertion (bet) signal are output. Is done.
Here, the “external signal” is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (a hall computer, a data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external concentration terminal board 100. In the present embodiment, an external signal 1 indicating AT activation, an external signal 2 indicating AT continuation, an external signal 3 indicating the time from the start to the end of AT, an error or power failure occurring in the slot machine 10, etc. And an external signal 5 indicating opening of the front door of the slot machine 10 are provided.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the external signal 1 can be set as a specific RT, or the external signal 2 can be set as a signal for a specific special game such as 1BB. It is not necessarily limited to AT.

The output ports 7 and 8 are ports for outputting sub-control data signals (control commands transmitted to the sub-control board 80). The output ports 7 output sub-control data signals 1 to 8, and the output port 8 The sub control data 9 to 16 are output.
The output ports 9 and 10 are set as ports for transmitting predetermined signals (information) to the testing machine. Here, the “test signal” means that the slot machine 10 connects the slot machine 10 (game machine) and the test machine and transmits a predetermined signal from the slot machine 10 to the test machine. It is a signal used to confirm whether it is designed according to the “Rules for Certification and Type Verification”. The connection between the slot machine 10 and the testing machine is not limited to a direct connection, but may be connected via an interface board for relaying.

Conditional devices 1 to 8 are assigned to the output port 9. Here, the “condition device” indicates a so-called winning number (winning type). In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the presence or absence of bonus (special role) winning is indicated by D6 and D7 bits. The D0 to D5 bits indicate the winning type. By using the D0 to D5 bits, 64 types of winning patterns can be output. By outputting a signal from the output port 9, it is possible to inform the outside which condition device is turned on (which winning) in the game.
The output port 10 is an output port for the test signals 1 to 8. Specific contents of the test signal will be described later.
As described above, data (referred to as “level data”) based on the signals of the input ports 0 to 2 is stored within one interrupt, and the stored control for the output ports 0 to 10 is stored. A signal is output based on the data.

  12 to 16 are diagrams showing storage addresses (addresses) of data stored in the RWM 61 and their contents. Note that the data shown in FIGS. 12 to 16 is data used in the description of the present embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 61 is not limited to these data.

  In FIG. 12, “_FL_MEDAL_STS” of the address “F01B” is a data storage area of a medal management flag. This medal management flag is a flag for mainly controlling the turning on / off of the status display LED 73. In the medal management flag, the D0 bit indicates the start switch 41 receiving state, and when the start switch 41 is received, that is, when the start switch 41 is operable (for example, a state before a bet is placed and a game is started). When it becomes “1” and the operation of the start switch 41 cannot be accepted (for example, while the reel 31 is rotating), it is set to “0”.

The blocker state of the D2 bit is data that is “1” when the blocker 45 is on, and is “0” when it is off. By determining the value of this D2 bit, it is possible to determine what state the current blocker 45 is in (on or off).
The D3-bit replay display LED is data that is set to “1” when a replay is displayed and a medal is automatically inserted as a replay (step S141 in FIG. 48). When this data is “1”, the replay display LED 73a of the above-described status display LEDs 73 is lit. Further, the data is set to “0” when the game by re-game is finished (step S73 in FIG. 41, step S542 in FIG. 61). When this data is “0”, the replay display LED 73a is turned off.

  The D4-bit settlement display LED is data that is set to “1” when the settlement switch 46 is operated to settle the stored medal. When this data is “1”, the settlement display LED 73c of the above-described status display LEDs 73 is turned on. Further, the data is set to “0” when the settlement of the stored medal is completed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the adjustment display LED 73c is lit when the adjustment of the stored medals that can be stored up to 50 is executed. However, the bet medals and the stored medals are displayed at a time. When it is formed so as to be settled, it is preferably formed so as to be set to “1” when the bet or the stored medal is settled (so that the settlement display LED 73c is lit).

  The D6 bit setting change disable flag is data that is “0” when the setting can be changed, and is “1” otherwise. In this embodiment, the data is set to “1” when the start switch 41 is operated and the game is advanced. When the medal acceptance of the next game is started (step S133 in FIG. 48), “0” is set. It is the data which is made. When the setting is changed, the value of the setting change permission flag is referred to. When the setting change disable flag is “1”, the setting change is not permitted. However, even if the setting change disable flag is “1”, if it is determined that the error cannot be recovered (for example, random number update abnormality determined for each interrupt process), the setting change is permitted and the setting change is not allowed. Based on this, it becomes possible to cancel the unrecoverable error.

  The D7-bit medal limit setting determination is data that is “1” when the bet medal number reaches the medal limit number, and is “0” when the medal limit number is not reached. As described above, the limit number is set to 3 (normally and during 1BB game) in the present embodiment. Accordingly, for example, during normal times, when the number of bet medals is 0, 1, or 2, the medal limit number has not been reached, so it is “0”, and when it is 3, the medal limit number has been reached. 1 ".

“_FL_ACTION” of the address “F015” is an operation state flag data storage area, and in this embodiment, replay is assigned to the D0 bit, 1BB is assigned to the D3 bit, and RB is assigned to the D4 bit.
For example, when the replay is won, the replay is activated, and the D0 bit is set to “1” when the game state is set (step S88 in FIG. 42). The D0 bit is changed from “1” to “0” when the game by re-game is finished (step S73 in FIG. 41, step S543 in FIG. 61).
Further, although not provided in the present embodiment, for example, when 2BB or CB is provided, allocation to empty bits of the operation state flag (for example, 2BB is assigned to the D1 bit and CB is assigned to the D2 bit).

“_FL_WIN” of the address “F043” is a storage area of the symbol combination display flag, and in this embodiment, replay is assigned to the D0 bit and 1BB is assigned to the D3 bit. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol has stopped, the D0 bit is set to “1”. This bit is changed from “1” to “0” when the next game starts (when the start switch 41 is operated).
In addition, although not provided in this embodiment, when 2BB, CB, and RB (single winning) are provided, for example, DBB is set to 2BB, D2 is set to CB, and D4 is set to correspond to the operation state flag. Allocating RB.

  In FIG. 13, “_PT_MEDAL_LED” at address “F01D” is a storage area of inserted sheet number display LED data, and 3 to 1 sheet insertion display LEDs 73g to 73e are assigned to the D0 to D2 bits, respectively. For example, when only the D2 bit is “1”, control is performed so that only the one-sheet insertion display LED 73e is lit. Further, when the D1 and D2 bits are “1”, the one-sheet insertion display LED 73e and the two-sheet insertion display LED 73f are controlled to be lit.

Furthermore, “_NB_REP_MEDAL” of the address “F06A” is a storage area of automatic insertion number data (data indicating the number of medals automatically bet upon replay winning), and “3” is stored in this embodiment.
“_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06B” is a storage area for medal bet number data, and in this embodiment, any one of “0” to “3” is stored.
“_NB_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06C” is a storage area for medal payout number data, and in the present embodiment, any value from “0” to “9” is stored. In the present embodiment, since the maximum payout number of medals in one game is 9, the maximum value of the medal payout number data is “9”. However, for example, when a 15-sheet payout combination is provided, the medal payout number data is “0” to “15”.

“_BF_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06D” is a storage area of the medal payout number data buffer, and in this embodiment, any of the values “0” to “9” is the same as “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06C”. Is remembered.
In this embodiment, when the winning combination is determined, the values of both “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06C” and “_BF_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06D” are updated. At the time of this update, the same value is stored in both addresses. Then, “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06C” is subtracted every time one medal is paid out, and becomes “0” when the medal payout ends. On the other hand, the value “_BF_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06D” is maintained without being updated depending on the medal payout. The stored value is maintained until the value is updated at the end of the next game.

  “_NB_PAYOUT” of the address “F00E” is a storage area for acquired number data. When the small role is won and the medal is paid out, the payout number is stored in the acquired number data. Based on this data, the display of the acquisition number display LED 72 is controlled. For example, when the acquired number data is “1”, this data “1” is read and “01” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72 (digits 3 and 4).

Here, “_NB_PAY_MEDAL (medal payout number data)” of the address “F06C” described above stores, for example, “9” when the 9 winning combination wins, and at the time of paying out medals (including addition to the stored number). The counter is decremented according to the number of payouts, such as “9” → “8” → “7” →... → “0”.
On the other hand, “_NB_PAYOUT (acquired number data)” of the address “F00E” is, for example, “1” → “2” → “3” →. The counter is added in accordance with the medal payout.
Therefore, the display by the acquired number display LED 72 is performed using “_NB_PAYOUT (acquired number data)”.

“_NB_CREDIT” of the address “F00D” is a storage area of the stored number display data, and stores the data for displaying the stored number at that time in the stored number display LED 71 described above.
Here, in this embodiment, the data itself is a hexadecimal number (H), but a value obtained by converting the stored number into a decimal number is stored. For example, when the stored number to be displayed is “29”, a value “29H” is stored. In other words, “00101001B” is stored in the address “F00D”. Thereby, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of the address “F00D” are used to display the lower digit (“9” in this example) of the stored number, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are used for the stored number. It is stored as data for displaying the upper digit ("2" in this example). In the present embodiment, since the upper limit value of the number of stored sheets is “50”, the stored data value is in the range of “0” to “50”.

  In this embodiment, the address of the RWM 61 that stores the stored number data itself is not provided, but the stored number display data is provided as display data of the stored number display LED 71. However, the stored number display data is the stored number data itself.

In FIG. 14, “_CT_SEG_DSP” at address “F00F” is a storage area for storing the value of the LED display request counter described above. Further, “_FL_SEG_DSP” of address “F010” is a storage area for storing the value of the LED display request flag described above.
Furthermore, “_BF_ERR_DSP” of the address “F011” is a storage area for storing the content of the error that has occurred when a recoverable error has occurred in the slot machine 10. When no recoverable error has occurred, “00H” is stored. When a recoverable error occurs, a value corresponding to the generated error is stored, and in this embodiment, nine types of errors are detected as shown in FIG. The recoverable error is not limited to this.
While a recoverable error is occurring, a value corresponding to the error is stored, but when the error factor is removed (returning from the error), the value is updated to “00H”.

  “_PT_STS_LED” of the address “F012” is a storage area for storing ON / OFF of the game start display LED 73d (D0), the throw-in display LED 73b (D2), and the replay display LED 73a (D3) among the state display LEDs 73 described above. is there.

  In FIG. 15, “_CT_BB1_PAY” of addresses “F060” and “F061” is an acquired number counter (storage area storing the maximum number of medals that can be acquired in 1BB game) at the time of 1BB operation. At the start of 1BB game, “451” (decimal number) is set as an initial value. Each time a medal is paid out, the stored value is subtracted. In other words, the 1BB game of the present embodiment ends with the payout of more than 450 medals. Since the acquired number counter at the time of 1BB operation counts the range from “0” to “451” (decimal number), the addresses “F060” (upper 8 bits) and “F061” (lower 8 bits) for 2 bytes For example, when a range of “0” to “255” or less is employed, only the one-byte address “F060” is used.

“_CT_BONUS_PLAY” of the address “F073” is a storage area of a game number counter at the time of RB operation, and “0” to “2” are stored in this embodiment.
Further, “_CT_BONUS_WIN” of the address “F074” is a storage area of a winning number counter at the time of RB operation, and “0” to “2” are stored in the present embodiment.
Here, in the present embodiment, 1BB (a bonus continuous action device) is provided as a big bonus, and during the 1BB game, the RB (the first kind special bonus) is activated (the RB game is executed). Is set. Furthermore, the RB game is set so as to continue until the number of games reaches 2 or the number of wins satisfies at least one of the two times and continues until the end condition of 1BB game (payout exceeding 450) is satisfied. ing.
For this reason, during the 1BB game, the game count and the winning count of the RB game are continuously counted.

  “_CT_INTR” of the addresses “F02B” and “F02C” is an interrupt counter storage area (also referred to as interrupt counter value storage means). The value of the interrupt counter is an increment counter having a range of “0” to “65535”, and the value is updated (“+1”) for each interrupt. In this embodiment, since “0” to “65535” are adopted as the interrupt counter values, the 2-byte address “F02B” (upper 8 bits) and the same as the acquired number counter at the time of 1BB operation described above are used. Although “F02C” (lower 8 bits) is used, for example, when the range of “0” to “255” is adopted, only the one-byte address “F02B” is used.

  “_TM2_GAME” of the address “F03A” is a timer for monitoring one minimum game time, and when “1836” is set as an initial value, “1” is subtracted for each interrupt. The minimum game time of this embodiment is set to “4.1 seconds” (2.235 ms × 1836≈4100 ms).

“_NB_CND_NOR” of the address “F039” is a storage area for winning and replay condition device numbers (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “condition device numbers”), and lottery of condition devices is performed. A value corresponding to the winning and replay condition device is stored. The value stored here is used for selection of a stop position determination table used for stop control of the reel 31, AT lottery (addition during AT), selection of an effect group number, and the like.
In the present embodiment, winning (small role) and replay condition device numbers “0” to “51”, which are condition devices that do not carry the winning information to the next game, and role devices that can carry the winning information to the next game. The material condition device number “1” is provided. The storage area of the winning and replay condition device number of the address “F039” is a storage area of the condition device that does not carry the winning information to the next game.

  On the other hand, “_NB_CND_BNS” of the address “F040” is a storage area of an accessory condition apparatus number that can carry over the winning information, and in this embodiment, “0” or “1” depending on whether 1BB is won or not. Is stored. Similarly to the above, this value is also used for selection of a stop position determination table used for stop control of the reel 31, AT lottery (addition during AT), selection of production group number, and the like. In addition, when two 1BB are provided, or when one 2BB is provided in addition to one 1BB, not only whether or not a special combination (bonus combination) is won, but also indicates the type of special combination selection. In addition, any one of “0”, “1”, and “2” is stored.

“_NB_RT_STS” of the address “F001” is a storage area for storing the RT state number. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, there are six types of RT states, “0” (non-RT) to “5” (RT5), and data indicating which RT is the current RT. Remember.
“_NB_GAM_STS” of the address “F08F” is a storage area for storing the number of the main game state. In the present embodiment, there are eight main game states of “main game state 0” to “main game state 7”, and data indicating which main game state is the current main game state is stored. To do. For example, when the main game state is 0, “0” is stored.

“_CT_GAM_STS” of the address “F099” is a storage area for storing the precursor counter value and the AT counter value. In the present embodiment, during non-AT (a state in which the right to execute AT is not held) called so-called “during normal operation”, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute AT based on the selected condition device. When it is decided to execute AT, the precursor counter value is decided by lottery. The precursor counter value is determined as a decimal number in the range of “0” to “32”, and the determined value is stored in the storage area of the address. Then, for each game, the counter value is decremented by “1”, and when it becomes “0”, the state shifts to AT preparation (game state in the previous stage of executing AT).
Further, the AT stores an initial value of the number of games played by the AT (for example, “30” in decimal number) at the address. Then, for each game, the counter value is decremented by “1”, and when it becomes “0”, AT ends.
In addition, since the sign (non-AT) and the AT do not proceed at the same time, a single counter “F099” is used to count the number of precursor games and an AT counter that counts the number of games in the AT. And the storage capacity of the RWM 61 can be reduced.

“_NB_ORD_INF” of the address “F0B8” is a storage area for storing a push order instruction number. In the present embodiment, a pushing order advantageous to the player is assigned to each winning (winning and replaying) condition device (including both cases of having a pushing order advantageous to the player and not having it). ), When a predetermined condition is satisfied, push order instruction information corresponding to the selected condition device is acquired and stored at this address. For example, as shown in FIG. 34, when the selected condition device number is “23”, since the push order instruction information is “1”, this “1” is stored.
Note that “when a predetermined condition is satisfied” is when “Yes” is obtained in step S214 of FIG. 52 described later (in the push order instruction state). Accordingly, in the push order instruction state, the push order instruction number is acquired and stored in the RWM 61. However, when not in the push order instruction state, the processing after step S215 is not executed. This memory is not executed.

  “_NB_ACT_GRP” of the address “F0B7” is a storage area for storing the production group number. In this embodiment, when lottery of condition devices is performed, an effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device is selected. For example, as shown in FIG. 36, when the selected condition device number is “23”, “13” is selected as the effect group number, and this “13” is stored.

  In FIG. 16, “_NB_CNDINF_N” of the address “F04C” is a storage area for winning and replay condition device information, and when a condition device is selected, a number (condition device number) corresponding to the selected condition device is stored. Is done. In other words, this address is a storage area for storing information to be generated based on “_NB_CND_NOR” of the address “F039” and transmitted to the testing machine. In the winning and replay condition device information, information is generated so that the D6 bit is always “1”, and the D0 to D5 bits are values corresponding to the selected condition device (in this embodiment, “0”). To any one of “51”) is stored. For example, when “00000101B” is stored in the address “F039” (when replay B4 is selected in this embodiment), “01000101B” is stored in the address “F04C”. Further, when “00000000B” is stored in the address “F039” (when the condition device number is “0”), “01000000B” is stored in the address “F04C”.

  In addition, “_NB_CNDINF_B” of the address “F04D” is a storage area for the accessory condition device number, and corresponds to the selected condition device depending on whether or not 1BB (or 2BB if 2BB is provided) is won. The number to be stored is stored. In other words, this address is a storage area for storing information to be generated based on “_NB_CND_BNS” of the address “F040” and transmitted to the testing machine. In this accessory condition apparatus information, information is generated so that the D7 bit is always “1”. Further, when the 1BB is not won, the D0 bit is set to “0”, and when the 1BB is won or when the 1BB is in the middle, the D0 is D0. The bit is set to “1”. For example, when “00000001B” is stored in the address “F040” (in this embodiment, when 1BB is selected), “10000001B” is stored in the address “F04D”. Further, when “00000000B” is stored in the address “F040” (in the present embodiment, when 1BB is not selected), “10000000B” is stored in the address “F04D”.

“_TM1_COND_OUT” of the address “F030” is an area for storing a timer value for measuring the output time of the condition device signal (winning and replay condition device information, and accessory condition device information). In this embodiment, “25” is set after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, and “1” is subtracted for each interrupt. Note that the subtraction of the timer value is performed in step S605 (timer measurement) of interrupt processing described later.
In this embodiment, about 53.64 ms is counted by 24 interrupts, and this 53.64 ms is the output time of the condition device signal. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, after the timer value is set to “25” after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the timer value is updated to “24” in the first interrupt processing. And while the timer value is “24” to “13”, the accessory condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B) is output, and when the timer value is “12” to “1”, the winning and replay condition device information ( _NB_CNDINF_N) is output. Further, while the timer value is “0”, the value “0” is output as the condition device information.

“_BF_SUBCMD” of addresses “F113” to “F153” is a storage area of the control command buffer (ring buffer), and stores a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80. In this storage area, 64 bytes of “F113” to “F153” (H) are secured. Control commands are stored in the control command buffer in the order of addresses. When a control command is stored at address “F153”, the next address at which the control command is stored is “F113”.
“_NB_CMDREAD” of the address “F017” is a storage area of the control command read pointer value. This value is a value for storing which address of the control command buffer should be read, and is incremented by “1” when the data of the control command buffer at the address is read.

  “_NB_CMDSTORE” of the address “F018” is a storage area of the control command write pointer value. This value is a value for storing at which address in the control command buffer the control command should be written, and is incremented by “1” when the control command is written into the control command buffer at the address.

Subsequently, the combination of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols, etc. will be described.
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the present embodiment. In FIG. 17, symbol numbers are also illustrated. For example, in the left reel 31, the symbol of symbol number 0 is “Replay B”.

As shown in FIG. 17, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is equally divided into 20 frames, and a predetermined symbol is displayed on each frame.
As shown in FIG. 17, in the present embodiment, “Replay” includes “Replay A” and “Replay B” which are different symbols. In addition, “watermelon” includes “watermelon A” and “watermelon B” which are different designs. Furthermore, “BAR” includes “Black BAR” and “White BAR” which are different designs.

18A shows the positional relationship between the display window (transparent window) 11 provided on the front mask portion (front door, not shown) of the slot machine 10 and each reel 31, and the effective line (design). FIG.
In this embodiment, three reels 31 (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction in this embodiment. Further, each reel 31 is arranged so that three symbols that are continuous in the vertical direction can be seen from the display window 11. Accordingly, the display windows 11 of the slot machine 10 are arranged so that a total of nine symbols (frames) can be seen. The number on the lower right of each symbol indicates the symbol number.

FIG. 18B illustrates the designation of symbol positions in this specification. In the present specification, for each reel 31, the symbol positions at the time of stopping as viewed from the display window 11 are referred to as “upper”, “middle”, and “lower” in order from the top. “Stage”, “Left middle” and “Lower left” shall be referred to.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18A, effective lines are set for the nine symbols visible from the display window 11.
Here, the “effective line” is a symbol combination line (display line) that is a symbol arrangement line when the reel 31 is stopped, and forms a symbol combination, and a symbol corresponding to one of the roles. When the combination stops at that line, it is the line that wins the role. In the present embodiment, one effective line (a straight line going up to the right passing through “lower left stage” − “middle middle stage” − “upper right stage”) is defined, and all the other symbol combination lines are invalid lines. It has become. For example, a straight symbol combination line passing through the left middle, middle middle, and right middle is an invalid line in this embodiment.

  An invalid line is a line that is not set as a valid line among symbol combination lines, and even if a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations stops on that line, a profit corresponding to the combination is given. This line does not perform (medal payout etc.). In other words, the invalid line is a line that is not a target of combination of symbols in the first place.

  Conventionally, there are known slot machines in which the number of effective lines differs according to the number of medals inserted. For example, when the number of inserted medals is 1, the number of effective lines is set to 1. When the number of inserted medals is 2, the number of effective lines is set to 3. When the number of inserted medals is 3, the number of effective lines is set to 5. And so on. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, during the game, two or three medals are inserted to play the game, and in all games, one of the medals shown in FIG. There is no change in the number of effective lines due to the number of inserted sheets. Therefore, in this specification, the term “effective line” refers to a straight line that rises obliquely to the right as shown in FIG.

FIG. 19 to FIG. 26 are diagrams showing combinations of combinations of types (combinations included in a condition device lottered by a lottery means 61 described later), the number of payouts, and the like in this embodiment. In FIG. 26, specific symbols 01 to 03 (spilled eyes) are also illustrated as combinations of symbols that may not be played but may be displayed when a specific condition device is won (FIG. 26). Medium numbers “155” to “160” (described later).
The roles of this embodiment are roughly classified into special roles, replays, and small roles.
A combination of symbols corresponding to each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning are determined. When all the reels 31 are stopped, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations stops on the active line (the combination wins, the same applies hereinafter), the number of medals corresponding to the combination is paid out.
However, the number of payouts at the time of winning a special role is set to 0. In replay, medals are automatically inserted (replay).

As shown in FIG. 19, the special combination includes 1BB (first type big bonus) (portion number “1”). Other special roles include 2BB (type 2 big bonus, also referred to as middle bonus (MB)), RB (regular bonus), SB (single bonus), and the like. Is not provided.
The special role is a role to shift from the normal game to the special game.
When winning 1BB, medals are not paid out in the game, but the game shifts from the next game to the 1BB game corresponding to the special game.
The 1BB game is an advantageous game for the player who can expect to win medals more than the normal game because the payout rate is set to exceed 1.

In addition, the replay (re-playing combination) is a combination that enables a re-play that maintains the number of medals inserted in the game (automatic bets on medals).
As shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the replay of the present embodiment includes replays 01 to 13 (port numbers “2” to “77”). Furthermore, one or more symbol combinations are provided for one replay. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, there is only one type of symbol combination of the replay 10 (the role number “73”). On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the replay 07 (the role numbers “36” to “67”) has a total of 32 kinds of symbol combinations.

Replay 01 is referred to as normal replay.
The replay 02 is a kind of normal replay, but is a replay set so as to overlap with a replay for transferring RT (referred to as “RT transfer replay”).
Replays 03 to 06 are RT transition replays. The RT transfer replay is a replay in which, when the replay wins in the game, the game is transferred from the RT to another RT. In the present embodiment, the replays 03 and 04 are replays (referred to as “falling replay” or “punk play”) that shift to an RT that is more disadvantageous to the player than the previous RT. On the other hand, replays 05 and 06 are replays (referred to as “elevation replays”) that shift to RTs that are more advantageous to the player than the previous RTs.

The replay 07 is a replay that can be in a so-called middle cherry stop mode (a “cherry” symbol stop at the middle left position). As symbols of the left reel 31 of the replay 07, “white BAR” (role numbers “36” to “43”) and “blank” (role numbers “60” to “67”) are provided. Stops at the active line (lower left), “Cherry” stops at the middle left. When winning numbers “52” to “59” are won, “Cherry” stops on the active line (lower left). Furthermore, when winning numbers “44” to “51” are won, “cherry” does not appear in the display window 11 when the left reel 31 is stopped.
In this embodiment, replay 09 is a replay that causes a combination of symbols used as chances to appear. That is, at the time of winning the condition device including the replay 09, an AT (addition of the number of AT executions during the AT) is drawn.

Replays 10 to 13 have a role as control replays, and are replays provided to increase the number of replay duplicate winning combinations (the number of conditional devices). The combination of symbols is effective during the game. Never stop on line.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a specific condition is satisfied, the symbol combination of the control replay may be stopped on the active line. For example, when a specific condition device including a control replay is won in a specific RT (for example, an internal game) and the stop switch 42 is operated in a specific push order and a specific operation timing, the control replay is performed. It is possible to stop the combination of symbols on the active line.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, the small combination includes small combinations 01 to 24 (portions “78” to “154”). In the column of the payout number etc. of the small role, for example, “9/9” in FIG. 23 means that the prize (1BB in the present embodiment) is not activated (that is, other than during the 1BB game) is won. Means that 9 coins are paid out, and 9 winnings are awarded when a prize is activated when an accessory is activated (ie during 1BB game).

The small roles 01 to 08 are included in the condition device of the so-called push order bell. When winning the push order bell condition device, the small role 01 or 02 (high paying bell with 9 payouts) is displayed in the correct push order. Winning a prize, and in the order of incorrect answering, small roles 04-08 (Ameme Bell, one payout) wins.
The small roles 09 to 20 are used to display specific symbols (described later, described in the role numbers “155” to “160”), and are correct when a condition device including the small roles 09 to 20 is elected. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, these small roles win a prize, but when the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect answer pressing order, a case where these small roles win a prize and a specific symbol is displayed. If you have.

The small roles 21 to 23 are so-called “watermelon roles” (rare roles), and when winning the small role 21, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” stops in the middle and middle tiers (the “watermelon” A "or" Watermelon B "assortment.)
In addition, when the small role 22 is won, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” stops on the active line.
Furthermore, at the time of winning the small role 23, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” stops at the lower left (the “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” aligns with the lower line by pushing).
The so-called “cherry role” is not provided as a small role, and as described above, a replay in which “cherry” stops is provided.
The small combination 24 is a combination included in the condition device that is drawn by lottery only when the combination is activated, that is, during 1BB game.

  As described above, the specific symbols 01 to 03 are not roles, but when a combination of the symbols stops at an effective line in a specific RT (non-RT, RT2, RT3 in this embodiment), the RT is shifted ( In this embodiment, it is a combination of symbols (transferred to RT1). As described above, it is displayed when the winning small combination 09 to 20 cannot be won at the time of winning the condition device including at least one of the small combinations 09 to 20.

In each of the above-mentioned combinations, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination does not stop on the active line in the game selected for the combination, a combination that is carried over after the next game and a combination that is not carried over are determined. .
The combination carried over is a special combination (1BB in this embodiment). When a special role is won, in the game until the special role is won, the winning information of the special role is controlled to be carried over from the next game onward.

  On the other hand, the winning of special roles is carried over, while small roles and replays other than special roles are not carried over. In the lottery of the condition device, when a winning combination or replay is won, the winning combination is valid only in the game, and the winning is not carried over after the next game. That is, in the game won for these winning combinations, the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination can be won, but at the end of the game regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won. The right to the elected role will cease.

  A game in which a special role is not won (a game in which a special role is not carried over) is referred to as “non-inside”. A game in which a special role is won in a game before the game but the selected special role is not won (a game in which the special role is carried over) is called “inside”.

  At the start of the game, the player operates the bet switch 40 to insert a previously stored medal, or inserts a medal from the medal insertion slot 43, and operates (turns on) the start switch 41. When the start switch 41 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 60. When receiving this signal, the main control board 60 (specifically, a reel control unit 63g described later) controls to drive all the motors 32 and rotate all the reels 31. As the reel 31 is rotated by the motor 32 in this way, the symbols on the reel 31 are moved and displayed in the vertical direction in the display window 11 at a predetermined speed.

  Then, the player presses the stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 60. When receiving this signal, the main control board 60 (specifically, a reel control means 63g described later) drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 to stop the reel 31 related to the motor 32. I do.

  Then, the game result of the game is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops on the active line (when the winning combination of the winning combination), a medal corresponding to the winning combination is paid out.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 60 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 63 of the main control board 60 includes the following setting change means 63a and the like. Note that the following means in the present embodiment are examples, and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The setting change means 63a is a means for changing and determining the set value.
Here, the set value defines the degree of player's advantage, more specifically, the expected value of the payout number with respect to the number of inserted medals (medals that can be acquired by the player), and is set in this embodiment. 1 to setting 6 stages are provided.
The higher the set value, the higher the advantage for the player, such as the higher the winning probability of at least some of the winning combinations (particularly 1BB).
Also, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning the AT.
In addition, it is not restricted only to making the probability which transfers to AT high, For example, the probability of adding up the number of games and payout number in AT may be made high, and the probability of continuing AT may be made high.

In order to set / change the set value, a power switch 51, a setting key switch 52, and a setting change / reset switch 53 are used.
In the present embodiment, when the power switch 51 is once turned off and the power is turned off, a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 52 is turned on. When the power switch 51 is turned on again in this state, the setting is being changed, that is, the setting changing mode is entered. In this case, normal startup processing is not performed. Therefore, in order to change the setting, the power switch 51 needs to be turned on / off.

In the setting change mode, the setting changing means 63a displays the current setting value on the setting value display LED 64.
The setting change means 63a displays the set value every time the setting change / reset switch 53 is operated (turned on) once... → “1” → “2” → “3” → “4” “→” 5 ”→“ 6 ”→“ 1 ”→“ 2 ”→...

Further, when the start switch 41 is turned on, the setting change means 63a determines the setting value with the numerical value displayed on the setting value display LED 64 at this time, and “0” indicating that the setting value has been determined. Is displayed on the set value display LED 64. The set value determined here is stored as set value data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 61.
Then, the setting changing means 63a turns the setting key 90 degrees counterclockwise to turn off the setting key switch 52, thereby enabling a game with the setting value after the setting change.

In this embodiment, the determination of the setting key switch 52 being turned off is performed based on the falling data of the setting key switch 52. However, the setting key switch 52 is turned on / off. You may comprise so that it may be performed based on.
Further, it may be configured so that the game cannot be performed with the setting value after the setting change unless the setting key is removed from the setting key insertion slot.
Further, if the setting key is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise to turn off the setting key switch 52, the setting key is removed from the setting key insertion slot, and the power switch 51 is once turned off in this state and then not turned on again. You may comprise so that a game cannot be performed with the setting value after a setting change.

In addition, in the state where no medals are bet and the part lottery is not performed (before the start switch 41 is operated), the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot, and the setting key switch 52 is turned on. And “Settings are being confirmed”. That is, when only the set value is confirmed, it is not necessary to turn on / off the power switch 51. During the setting confirmation, the setting value at the present time is displayed on the setting display LED 64 as in the case of the setting change.
Furthermore, when the power switch 51 is turned on while the setting key switch 52 is turned on, reset, that is, initialization processing is performed. This initialization process will be described later.

The condition device lottery means 63b performs lottery (determination, selection) of the condition device (that is, the winning combination). Here, the “condition device” is a winning lottery object composed of one or a plurality of roles. For example, when one condition device is won (determined or selected), the winning combination included in the condition device is won.
Accordingly, the condition device lottery means 63b is also referred to as a role lottery means, a winning combination determination (or selection) means, and the like.
Also, “winning condition device” is also referred to as a role lottery result, a winning number, a winning result, or the like.
The condition device lottery means 63b is based on, for example, a random number generator for lottery (hardware random number, etc.), a random number extractor for extracting a random number generated by the random number generator, and a random value extracted by the random number extractor. And determining means for determining whether or not the condition device has been won and for determining the selected condition device. Such a lottery method is the same in the following AT lottery.

  The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined area (for example, “0” to “65535” in decimal numbers). The random number is, for example, a random number for which a counter that performs 1 count at 200 n (nano) sec continues to count as a cycle in a range of “0” to “65535”. While the slot machine 10 is powered on, the random number Keep counting.

  The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means determines the condition device corresponding to the region to which the random number value belongs by comparing the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with a condition device lottery table to be described later. For example, if the extracted random value belongs to the area of the winning and replay condition device “1” (replay A), it is determined that the winning and replay condition device “1” is won.

27 to 31 are diagrams showing the types of condition devices that are selected by the condition device lottery means 63b and the contents of the winning combination included in each condition device.
In the following description, the condition device will be mainly described, and details of the stop control of the reel 31 based on the pressing order and the operation timing (line push) when the condition device is won will be described in the reel control means 63g. .

The condition device of the present embodiment includes a “winning and replay condition device” that is a condition device that does not carry winning information to the next game, and a “condition item condition device” that is a condition device that can carry the winning information to the next game. Become.
The winning and replay condition device corresponds to a so-called small role or winning of replay, and includes winning and replay condition device numbers “1” to “51”.
Further, the accessory condition device corresponds to the winning of the special combination (1BB in the present embodiment), and includes the accessory condition device number “1”.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, the accessory condition device number “1” is a single winning of 1BB. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a duplicate winning combination of 1BB and a small role or replay may be used. In this case, the winning of 1BB will carry over, but the small role or replay that has been won by overlapping with 1BB will not carry over the winning.
In the following description, the winning and replay condition device is simply referred to as “condition device” when there is no possibility of being confused with the accessory condition device, or when collectively including both of them.

First, the winning and replay condition device will be described.
The condition device number “0” corresponds to a non-winning role (so-called “losing”).
In addition, the replay A with the condition device number “1” is a normal replay win, and includes replays 01 and 02 (duplicate wins).
The replays B1 to B5 with the condition device numbers “2” to “6” correspond to RT transition replays, and both are duplicate winnings of the replay 05 and the replays 01 and / or 02. When the stop switch 42 is operated in a specific pressing order, the replay 05 wins, and when the stop switch is operated in any other pressing order, the replay 01 or 02 wins.
In FIG. 27, in the “remarks” of the replays B1 to B5 and C1 to C5, the display of “(*)” indicates the replay that shifts (promotes) RT. For example, in the replay B1, when the replay 05 wins, the RT shifts, and when the replay 01 or 02 wins, the RT does not shift.
Further, in FIG. 27 and subsequent figures, the numbers displayed in the remarks indicate the pressing order. The pressing order is indicated by “1” for the left stop switch 42, “2” for the middle stop switch 42, and “3” for the right stop switch 42.

Specifically, the pressing order is as follows.
123: Left middle right 132: Left and right middle 213: Middle left and right 231: Middle right left 312: Right left middle 321: Right middle left 1-: First stop left (second and third stops are optional. That is, left middle right and Means either left or right.)
-1-: During the first stop (the second and third stops are optional, that is, mean any of middle left and right and middle right and left)
--1: First stop right (second and third stops are optional. That is, it means either right left middle or right middle left)

In FIG. 27, the replays C1 to C5 of the condition device numbers “7” to “11” correspond to RT transition replays, and both are duplicate winnings of the replay 06 and the replays 03 and / or 04. When the stop switch 42 is operated in a specific pressing order, replay 06 (RT transition replay) wins, and when the stop switch is operated in any other pressing order, replay 03 or 04 wins.
In FIG. 28, the replays D1 to D3 with the condition device numbers “12” to “14” correspond to RT transition replays, and both are repetitive winnings of the replay 01 or 02 and the replays 03 and / or 04.
When the replays D1 to D3 are selected, the replay that maintains the current RT (does not shift) is replay 01 or 02 ("(*)" in FIG. 28), and the replay 03 or 04 is a replay that falls the RT.

The replay E (weak cherry) of the condition device number “15” is a single winning of the replay 07, and as described above, “cherry” is displayed in the display window 11 (left in the embodiment) by pressing the left reel 31 when stopped. It is a role that can appear in the lower row. Specifically, any one of the role numbers “44” to “51” in FIGS. 21 and 22 (“Cherry” is not stopped in the display window 11 when the left reel 31 is stopped) or the role number “52”. ”To“ 59 ”(“ Cherry ”is stopped and displayed in the lower stage when the left reel 31 is stopped) is controlled to be stopped and displayed.
The replay F (strong cherry) of the condition device number “16” is a winning combination of the replays 07, 08, and 10, and as described above, “cherry” is displayed on the display window 11 when the left reel 31 is stopped. It is a role that can appear inside (in the embodiment, left middle). Specifically, stop control is performed in the same way as when the condition device number “15” is selected in the case of forward pressing, but in the case of irregular pressing (the first stop is in the middle or on the right, and the order of pressing after the second stop does not matter) 21 and FIG. 22, one of the role numbers “36” to “43” (“Cherry” is stopped and displayed in the middle when the left reel 31 is stopped), and the role numbers “44” to “51” Either ("Cherry" is not stopped and displayed in the display window 11 when the left reel 31 is stopped), any of the role numbers "60" to "67"("Cherry" is stopped in the middle when the left reel 31 is stopped) Control to stop display).

  Here, the conditional device number “15” (weak cherry) and the conditional device number “16” (strong cherry), for example, differ in the number of special winnings (1BB) and the lottery regarding AT ( Stop by increasing the chance that it will be more advantageous to the player when the condition device number is determined to be “16” by changing the number of winning positions (including extra lottery during AT) The balance between the outcome and the game result (decision result) can be made appropriate.

Replays G1 to G3 of the condition device numbers “17” to “19” (pressing middle stage cherries) are duplicate winnings of replay 07 and replays 01 and 02 (in addition, at least one of replays 09 to 11 is included) It is. When the replays G1 to G3 are won, the middle cherries (“cherry stop” in the middle left) can be displayed in accordance with the pressing order of the stop switch 42. In FIG. 28, “(*)” indicates a replay 07 that can be a middle cherry.
Replays H1 to H3 of the condition device numbers “20” to “22” are duplicate winnings including replays 01 and 02 and replay 09 (otherwise, replay 10 or 11 may be included). When the replays H1 to H3 are won, the replay 09 set for the chance can be stopped according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42. In FIG. 28, “(*)” indicates a replay 09 that is a chance.

  In FIG. 29, all of the small roles A1 to A6, B1 to B6, and C1 to C6 of the condition device numbers “23” to “40” are duplicate winning of a plurality of small roles 01 to 08, so-called “push order”. It is a duplicate winning equivalent to "Bell". Therefore, when winning the small combination A1 or the like, the high eye bell wins when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order, and the low eye bell wins when the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect answer pressing order. In FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, “(*)” indicates nine bells which are high eye bells (Ameme bell is one bell).

The small combination D of the condition device number “41” is a winning combination of the small combinations 01 to 03 (all nine), and a conditional device (no matter what order is pushed), regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. Bell).
The condition device numbers “42” to “47” are condition devices that are duplicate winnings of a plurality of small roles and that can display a specific symbol. In the present embodiment, the stop switch 42 is operated in a specific pressing order, and a specific symbol is made to appear when a small role that can be won when the stop switch 42 is operated in the specific pressing order is missed.

The small combination F of the condition device number “48” is a so-called “weak watermelon” and is one of the rare combinations. In the present embodiment, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” can be stopped on a straight line by pushing.
The small combination G of the condition device number “49” is a so-called “strong watermelon” and is one of rare combinations. In this embodiment, at the time of winning the small role F (weak watermelon) and the small role G (strong watermelon), both AT lottery (additional lottery during AT) is performed, but the small role F wins the small role F The lottery is performed on condition that the AT winning probability is more advantageous to the player than at the time of winning. At the time of winning the small role G, as in the case of winning the small role F, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” can be stopped on a straight line by pushing.

The small combination H with the condition device number “50” is a conditional device that wins the small combination 07 or the small combination 08 positioned as a strong chance. At the time of winning the replays H1 to H3 (pushing order chances) and the small role H (strong chances) with the condition device numbers “20” to “22” described above, the AT lottery (the extra lottery during the AT) is performed. However, when the small role H is won, the lottery is performed on the condition that the AT winning probability is more advantageous to the player than when the replays H1 to H3 are won.
The small combination I of the condition device number “51” is a small combination (special combination) that is won during the RB game, as shown in FIG. The small role I is a winning combination of all small roles (small roles 01 to 24).
Further, 1BB of the accessory condition device number “1” is a single winning of 1BB, which is a special role, and is a conditional device in which winning information is carried over to the next game until winning.

FIG. 32 shows winning probabilities determined by the condition device lottery table when the condition device lottery means 63b performs lottery of the condition devices, and shows the winning and replay condition devices and winning probabilities (numbers) for each RT. FIG. That is, in FIG. 32, the accessory condition device (condition device including 1BB in the winning combination) and its winning probability are not shown.
The conditional device lottery table defines the winning probability of the conditional device for each RT. The numerical value shown in FIG. 32 is a value for the number “65536”. For example, in the non-RT (winning and replay) condition device number “1” (replay A), the probability number “8938” that is not won is The winning probability is “8938/65536”.

First, in non-RT, only replay A is provided as a condition device corresponding to winning of replay, and other replays are not drawn.
In RTs other than RT5 (1BB game), Replay A is always drawn. Furthermore, in RT1 to RT4, a special replay is drawn. As shown in FIG. 32, replays B1 to B5 and replays E and F are drawn at RT1, replays C1 to C5 and replays E and F are drawn at RT2, and replays D1 to D3, E, F, and G1 are drawn at RT3. G3 and H1-H3 are drawn by lottery.

In RT5 (1BB game), replays are not drawn.
In addition, when viewed from the combined winning probability of replay, non-RT is the lowest (except RT5), RT1 and RT2 are higher than non-RT (RT1 and RT2 have the same probability), and RT3 is the highest. Since RT3 is an RT that controls to stay in the AT, the winning probability of replay is set to be the highest. For this reason, in this embodiment, it can be said that AT is ART (AT + RT (high probability of replay)).

The small combinations A1 to C6 corresponding to the push order bell and the other small combinations D to H are drawn by RT except RT5.
The small role I is drawn only at RT5. The winning probability of the small role I at RT5 is “1” (65536/65536).
Although not shown in FIG. 32, since the non-RT and RT1 to RT3 are not inside, a condition device including 1BB is drawn, but in RT4 (inside) and RT5 (in 1BB game), Conditional devices including 1BB are not drawn.

In the condition device lottery table, the condition device including 1BB and its number are set as follows, for example.
(1) 1BB (single winner): Number “40”
(2) 1BB + Replay E (weak cherry): Number “20”
(3) 1BB + Replay F (Strong Cherry): Number “90”
(4) 1BB + small part F (weak watermelon): Numeral "25"
(5) 1BB + small role G (strong watermelon): Numeral "65"
(6) 1BB + small role H (strong chance): Number “60”
Specifically, it is possible to provide a case where 1BB alone wins and a case where 1BB and a small role, a replay or a chance item are won simultaneously. Furthermore, the probability that the strong cherry is stronger than the weak cherry, the strong watermelon is weaker than the weak watermelon, and the strong chance is more likely than the weak chance is to set a higher probability of winning with 1BB at the time of winning.
The winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) stores “0” in the case of (1), “15” in the case of (2), and the case of (3) above. “16” is stored in “4”, “48” is stored in the case of (4), “49” is stored in the case of (5), and “50” is stored in the case of (6). Will be stored.
Although details will be described later, the effect group number and the push order instruction number are determined based on the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR), and the game won by the special role is also determined by the same process.

Returning to FIG.
The winning flag control means 63c controls the on / off of the winning flag corresponding to each combination based on the lottery result by the condition device lottery means 63b. In this embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each combination for all combinations. When any of the condition devices is won in the lottery by the condition device lottery means 63b, the winning flag of the combination included in the condition device is turned on (the winning flag is set).

  For example, in a non-internal game, when the replay B1 with the condition device number “2” is won, the three win flags of replay 01, replay 02, and replay 05 included in the condition device are turned on, and the other roles The winning flag will be off.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, winnings for small roles other than special roles and replays are not carried over, so even if a small role or replay is won in the game and the winning flag for these roles is turned on, At the end, the winning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, since the winning of the special role is carried over, when the special role is won in the game, and the winning flag related to the selected special role is once turned on, it remains on until the special role is won. It is maintained and turned off when the special role wins.

For example, when the condition device lottery means 63b wins 1BB of the equipment condition device number “1”, the 1BB winning flag is turned on in the game, and if 1BB is not won in the game, the 1BB winning flag is selected. Is kept on.
Furthermore, in the next game, when winning the small role A1 of the condition device number “23”, in addition to 1BB carrying over the winning, there are a total of four winning flags of the small role 01, the small role 04, and the small role 05. If 1BB does not win at the end of the game, the winning flag of 1BB is kept on, and the winning flags of small combination 01, small combination 04, and small combination 05 are turned off.

The AT lottery means 63d has a predetermined condition device as a result of the lottery performed by the condition device lottery means 63b described above at a predetermined RT (in this embodiment, non-RT, RT1 to RT3, RT5. RT4 has no AT lottery). When winning, the AT lottery (including the initial lottery lottery) is performed.
In this embodiment, the AT lottery (the lottery of the initial stock number) is performed in the non-RT, RT1 to RT3 when the AT is not won. In addition, during the AT, a lottery is performed by adding the number of AT stock.
In the present embodiment, the AT lottery state when the AT is not won is provided with low probability, normal, and high probability that the probability of winning the AT is different, and the AT lottery means 63d, depending on the winning condition device, The above-mentioned transition to low accuracy, normal, high accuracy, and transition to a precursor is determined by lottery. Here, the time when the decision is made to shift to a precursor corresponds to the winning of the AT (first win).

  Furthermore, in RT5 (1BB game to be described later), a lottery is performed with a predetermined probability for each game. In RT5, a lottery may be performed with a predetermined probability for each game regardless of the winning condition device, or a lottery may be performed with a predetermined probability based on the selected condition device. In the present embodiment, the AT lottery for winning with a probability of “1/50” is executed based on the winning of the condition device number “51” (winning probability “1”).

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an AT lottery table used by the AT lottery means 63d.
In this embodiment, in the non-RT, RT1 to RT3, the condition devices “1”, “15” to “22”, “41”, “48” to “50” are won as a result of the lottery by the condition device lottery means 63b. At that time, a transition lottery (also serving as an AT lottery) in the AT lottery state is performed. In FIG. 33, for example, when the condition device number “15” (weak cherry) is won during high accuracy during non-AT, the probability is “1/50” and the probability is “1/50”. And then move to normal and move to the precursor with a probability of “1/50” (that is, win the AT).

The normal replay with the winning and replay condition device number “1” is positioned as a condition device in which the AT lottery state falls. In addition, the weak cherry of the condition device “15” has a case where the AT lottery state falls or is promoted, or a case where the AT cherry lottery shifts to a precursor (wins the AT).
Furthermore, the condition devices “16” to “22”, “41”, “48” to “50” are so-called rare roles, and the AT lottery state is promoted or shifted to a precursor (winning the AT) It corresponds to a conditional device having a possibility.
Further, during the 1BB game (RT5), the AT lottery is executed so as to win with a probability of “1/50”. When the AT lottery is won during the 1BB game, the AT lottery may not be performed during the subsequent 1BB game, or the AT lottery may be continued.

Further, the AT lottery means 63d also executes a lottery of the number of AT stocks when the AT is won. There are various types of AT stock lottery. For example, “1 (single shot)” is “4/10”, “2” is “2/10”, etc. Can be mentioned. The number of stocks varies depending on the winning AT lottery status, the condition device that triggered the winning, etc. (details are not described).
In addition, when a so-called rare role is won during AT, an additional (addition) lottery is performed.

The push order instruction number selection unit 63e selects a push order instruction number based on the lottery result of the condition device by the condition device lottery unit 63b.
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a push order instruction number table. In the figure, (A) shows the data structure of the push order instruction number table, and (B) shows the relationship between the address and data stored in the ROM 62.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34 (A), each of the condition devices “0” to “51” (winning and replaying) has a unique push order instruction number. For example, the push order instruction number corresponding to the (win and replay) condition device number “1” (replay A) is “0”, and the push order instruction number corresponding to the condition device number “28” (small role A6) is “ 6 ”.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the relationship between the push order instruction number and the push order advantageous to the player. The push order instruction number “0” does not have a push order that is advantageous to the player (the push order does not give any advantage / disadvantage, that is, the push order is unquestioned).
In addition, the push order instruction numbers “1” to “9” each have a push order that is advantageous to the player. For example, the advantageous pushing order corresponding to the pushing order instruction number “2” is 132 (right and left), and the advantageous pushing order corresponding to the pushing order instruction number “9” is the right first stop (right and left middle, Or right middle left).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the “push order advantageous to the player” corresponds to the following push order, and corresponds to the push order marked with “*” in FIGS.
(1) Pushing order to promote RT or pushing order to maintain advantageous RT (pushing order not to fall into unfavorable RT) when duplicate replay is won (condition device numbers “2” to “14”)
(2) Push order bell (conditional device numbers “23” to “40”) Pushing order to win a high-priced bell (9 cards) when winning (3) Push order middle stage cherry (condition device numbers “17” to “19” ") Push order to win Replay 07 (middle cherries) at the time of winning (4) Push order chances (condition device numbers" 20 "to" 22 ") Push order to win Replay 09 (chance eyes) at the time of winning

  The push order instruction number table is stored in the storage area of the ROM 62 as shown in FIG. That is, the top address of the push order instruction number table is set to “1EDC”, and the push order instruction numbers when winning (winning and replay) condition device numbers “0” to “51” are selected in order of addresses from “1EDC”. It is remembered.

For example, when the condition device number “10” is selected, the condition device number “10” is used as an offset value, and the address ahead of “10 E” from the start address “1EDC” of the push order instruction number table, that is, “1EE6” Is read, the push order instruction number “4” corresponding to the condition device number “10” is acquired.
In this embodiment, after lottery of each game and condition device, when the game is in the push order instruction state (when “Yes” in step S214 in FIG. 52 described later), the winning condition A push order instruction number corresponding to the device is acquired.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a push order instruction number may be acquired for each game, and transmitted to the sub-control board 80 when in the push order instruction state (during AT).

In FIG. 1, the effect group number selection means 63 f is an effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device, and selects a number to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
As a result of lottery of the condition devices, it may be considered that the selected condition device information itself is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. However, in this embodiment, the selected condition device information itself is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Thereby, the sub control board 80 cannot know the condition number won in the game.
On the other hand, on the main control board 60 side, an effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device is determined in advance. Then, after lottery of the condition device, the effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device is selected, and the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the effect group number selected in the game, the sub-control board 80 can select and output the effect corresponding to the effect group number.

FIG. 36 shows an effect group number table. In the figure, (A) shows the data structure of the effect group number table, and (B) shows the relationship between the address and data stored in the ROM 62.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), each of the condition devices “0” to “51” (winning and replaying) has a unique production group number. For example, the production group number corresponding to the condition device numbers “23” (small role A1) to “28” (small role A6) is defined as “13”.

Therefore, if the condition device number “23” is won as a result of the lottery of the condition device, the main control board 60 selects “13” as the effect group number. Then, the information of the selected effect group number “13” is transmitted to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the information that the effect group number is “13”, it can know that one of the small roles A (push order bell) has been won in the game. Thereby, the winning effect of the bell can be output. However, even if the sub-control board 80 receives the information indicating that the effect group number “13” has been won, the pressing order (correct answer pressing order) advantageous to the player does not receive the pressing order instruction number. I can't know. In this embodiment, an advantageous pushing order is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 during AT, but not during non-AT. Therefore, during AT, it is possible to output the fact that the small role A (Bell) has been elected and the pushing order advantageous to the advantage as an effect. It is not possible to output the push order that is advantageous to the advantageous person as the effect.

Even if the same push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, different effects can be output due to different effect group numbers. For example, the push order instruction number when winning Replay C1 (condition apparatus number 7) is “1” (left middle right), and the push order instruction number when winning small role A1 (condition apparatus number 23) is “ 1 ”(left middle right), the same push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in both cases.
However, when the replay C1 (condition device number 7) is won, the effect group number “3” is transmitted, and when the small role A1 (condition device number 23) is won, the effect group number “13” is transmitted. For this reason, when the production group number “3” is transmitted, it is possible to notify the correct pressing order using, for example, blue indicating replay. When the production group number “13” is transmitted, for example, a bell It becomes possible to notify the correct pressing order using the yellow color indicating.

Further, in the storage area of the ROM 62, it is stored as shown in FIG. In other words, the head address of the production group number table is set to “1E53”, and in order of the addresses from “1E53” (winning and replay), the condition device numbers “0” to “51” and the accessory condition device number “1”, respectively. The production group number (data) at the time of winning is stored.
For example, when the condition device number “10” is won, the condition device number “10” is used as an offset value, and the address “1E5D”, ie, “1E5D”, is the address ahead of “10” from the head address “1E53” of the effect group number table. By reading the address data, the production group number “3” of the condition device number “10” is acquired.

  In FIG. 1, the reel control means 63g starts rotation of all (three) reels 31 when a rotation start command for the reels 31 is received, particularly when the start switch 41 is operated in this embodiment. To control. Furthermore, after the conditional device lottery means 63b performs the lottery of the condition device, the reel control unit 63g refers to the on / off of the winning flag in the game, and determines the stop position corresponding to the on / off of the winning flag. The table is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated, and the motor 32 is operated. Drive control is performed to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

  For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 63g selects a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (the combination with the winning flag turned on) within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. The reel 31 is stopped and controlled so as to be able to stop on the active line, and the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so as not to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than the winning combination (the combination whose winning flag is off) on the effective line. .

Here, “within the range of stop control of the reel 31” means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving frames (symbols)). Means within range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 rotations per minute at a constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set to be within 190 ms. Thereby, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to four frames.

  For example, in FIG. 17, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first “watermelon A” of the left reel 31 is located in the middle left stage, the four frames ahead, that is, up to the fifth “cherry”. The symbol can be stopped in the middle left. Therefore, at the above-described operation timing, the symbols of No. 1 (bita stop) to No. 5 (4 frames) are symbols that can be stopped at the middle left.

  At the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, when any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line, when the stop switch 42 is operated In addition, the design is controlled to stop at a predetermined effective line.

  That is, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the reel 31 is stopped until the reel 31 is stopped when the symbol related to the winning combination does not stop at a predetermined effective line. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range, the symbol related to the winning combination is controlled to stop as much as possible on the predetermined effective line (retraction stop control).

Conversely, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the effective line, the reel 31 is stopped when the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of 31 stop control, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is controlled so as not to stop on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won, the priority order of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the operation timing of the stop switch 42, and the like. The highest priority drawing pull-in control is performed.

Further, the reel control means 63g detects the pressing order (operation order) of the stop switch 42. The reel control means 63g detects which one of the left, middle and right stop switches 42 is operated when the stop switch 42 is operated by the player.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated is input to the reel control means 63g. By discriminating this signal, the reel control means 63g detects which stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is executed.

  Further, the reel control means 63g includes a stop position determination table for each condition device. The stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. In each stop position determination table, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first symbol (“watermelon A” in the case of the left reel 31) passes through the middle stage, the number of symbols is controlled to move. The stop position is set in advance so that the number of symbols is stopped in the middle.

Here, the pull-in rate (PB) will be described.
For example, the symbol related to 1BB is “black BAR” in all the reels 31 (FIG. 19). As shown in FIG. 17, one “black BAR” is provided for each reel 31 (both are 18). Therefore, the player cannot stop the “black BAR” on the active line unless the player operates the stop switch 42 at the timing when the “black BAR” stops on the active line.

  As described above, if the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate position of the reel 31 (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped on the effective line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped on the effective line. Inability to (draw to the effective line) is referred to as “PB (pull-in rate) ≠ 1”.

  On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), the target symbol can always be stopped (drawn) on the effective line. , Referred to as “PB = 1”.

“PB = 1” has a case in which all the reels 31 are in such a role and a case in which only a specific (partial) reel 31 is in that role.
As described above, in the present embodiment, since the maximum number of moving frames is “4”, when the target symbols are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less, “PB = 1”, which exceeds 5 symbols ( When arranged at intervals of 6 symbols or more, “PB ≠ 1”.

For example, in FIG. 17, “cherry” of the left reel 31 is arranged at the fifth and tenth positions. Therefore, the “cherry” of the left reel 31 is “PB ≠ 1”.
On the other hand, the “bells” of the left reel 31 are arranged at No. 2, No. 7, No. 12, and No. 17. That is, four pieces are arranged at intervals of five symbols. Accordingly, the “bell” of the left reel 31 is in the “PB = 1” arrangement.
As shown in FIG. 17, the “bell” has the “PB = 1” arrangement in the middle and right reels 31.

The “replay A” of the middle reel 31 has a “PB = 1” arrangement.
Furthermore, “Replay A” of the right reel 31 has a “PB = 1” arrangement. Similarly, “Replay B” of the right reel 31 has a “PB = 1” arrangement.
Further, in the left reel 31, “Replay A” is arranged in “PB ≠ 1”. Similarly, the “replay B” of the left reel 31 is also “PB ≠ 1”.
However, in the left reel 31, “PB = 1” is arranged in the sum of “Replay A” and “Replay B”. That is, either “Replay A” or “Replay B” is arranged at intervals of 5 symbols.

Hereinafter, the stop position determination table corresponding to each condition device will be described.
The non-winning table is used in the game when winning and replay condition device number “0” is won (when the winning combination is not winning), so that the combination of symbols corresponding to any winning combination does not stop on the active line. The combination of symbols at the time of stopping is determined.
The replay A table is used when winning and the replay condition device number “1” is won (repeated winning of replays 01 and 02), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the replay 01 or 02 is stopped on the active line. Further, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined. In this case, in FIG. 19, the combination of symbols of any of the role numbers “2” to “12” is stopped on the effective line.
Further, the replay A table stops the replay 01 or 02 at the active line regardless of the pressing order. Further, both of the replays 01 and 02 are set to “PB = 1”.

In such a case,
(1) Stop replay 01 in the full-press order (2) Stop replay 02 in the full-press order (3) Stop the replay 01 when the stop switch 42 is operated in a specific push order When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than the order, the replay 02 may be stopped.
First, when the replay 01 is stopped on the active line, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “watermelon B” or “bell” except for No. 17 is stopped on the active line (lower left). Regardless of the operation timing of the left stop switch 42, “Watermelon B” or “Bell” except for No. 17 can be stopped at the effective line (lower left). As a result, “Replay A” or “Replay B” stops in the middle left.

  Further, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” is stopped at the effective line (middle middle stage). Further, when the right reel 31 is stopped, the “bell” is stopped at the effective line (upper right). Both of these middle and right reels 31 are “PB = 1”. If “bell” is stopped on the active line (upper right) when the right reel 31 is stopped, “replay A” is stopped on the right middle. Therefore, when the replay 01 is won, “replay A / replay B” − “replay A” − “replay A” is stopped in the middle line (invalid line).

  Further, when the replay 02 is stopped at the active line, when the left reel 31 is stopped, any one of “black BAR”, “replay A”, and “watermelon A” is stopped at the active line (lower left). However, No. 3 and No. 8 “Replay A” are controlled so as not to stop at the active line. In the left reel 31, “Watermelon A” is arranged at No. 1, 6, and 11, so that “Replay A” at No. 3 and No. 8 can be prevented from stopping on the active line. Thereby, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” or “Replay B” is stopped in the upper left stage.

Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, any one of “red 7”, “black BAR”, and “cherry” can be stopped and stabbed on the active line (middle stage). However, the “cherry” of No. 0, No. 5, and No. 10 are controlled so as not to stop at the active line. Stop “No. 18” “Black BAR”, “No. 3” “Cherry”, No. 8 “Cherry”, No. 13 “Red 7” on the active line, then No. 0, No. 5, No. 10 “Cherry” Can not be stopped at the active line. Thus, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” is stopped at the middle upper stage.
Further, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay B” is stopped on the active line (upper right) (PB = 1).
As described above, when Replay 02 is won, “Replay A / Replay B” − “Replay A” − “Replay B” is stopped on the upper line (invalid line).

The replay B1 table is used in the game when the condition device number “2” is selected, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the replay 05 is stopped on the active line in the push order “left middle right”, and “left middle In the pressing order other than “right”, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 02 is stopped on the active line (see FIG. 27).
First, when the replay 05 is won, when the left reel 31 is stopped, any one of “black BAR”, “replay A”, and “watermelon A” is stopped on the active line (lower left). However, No. 3 and No. 8 “Replay A” are controlled so as not to stop at the active line. By stopping “Watermelon A” of No. 1, 6, or 11 on the active line, it is possible not to stop “Replay A” of No. 3 and No. 8 on the active line.
With this stop control, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” or “Replay B” stops at the upper left.

The “replay A” of the middle reel 31 and the “watermelon A” of the right reel are both arranged in “PB = 1”. Further, when “watermelon A” of the right reel 31 is stopped at the active line (upper right), “Replay B” is stopped at the lower right.
As described above, in the game using the replay B1 table, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of left middle right push, the replay 05 wins with “PB = 1”. Further, when Replay 05 wins, “Replay A / Replay B”-“Replay A”-“Replay B” are stopped on the invalid line of “upper left stage”-“middle middle stage”-“lower right stage”.
Further, as described above, since the replay 02 is “PB = 1”, the replay 02 always wins in the pressing order other than the middle left and right. When the replay 02 is awarded in the pressing order other than “left middle right”, it is the same as the stop control at the time of the replay 02 winning described above.

The replay B2 table is used in a game when the condition device number “3” is won (when replays 01, 02, 05, and 10 are overlapped), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, when the push order is “middle left and right” The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 05 is stopped on the effective line and the replay 02 is stopped on the effective line in the pressing order other than “left middle right”.
The replay B3 table is used in the game when the condition device number “4” is won (when the replays 01, 02, 05, and 11 are repeatedly won), and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the pressing order “middle left and right "Replay 05 is stopped on the active line at the time of the first stop to the left or in the pushing order" Right left middle ", Replay 01 is stopped at the active line, and at the first right stop, Replay 02 is stopped at the active line. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.

Furthermore, the replay B4 table is used in a game when the condition device number “5” is won (when replays 01, 02, 05, and 12 are duplicated), and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, When “middle”, replay 05 is stopped on the effective line, left first stop or when pressing “middle left and right”, replay 01 is stopped on the effective line, and right first stop is performed so that replay 02 is stopped on the effective line. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.
Further, the replay B5 table is used in the game when the condition device number “6” is won (when the replays 01, 02, 05, and 13 are simultaneously won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the first right stop The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 05 is stopped at the effective line, the replay 01 is stopped at the effective line at the first left stop, and the replay 02 is stopped at the effective line at the middle first stop. It is.

In the replay B2 table to the replay B5 table, stop control at the time of replay 01, 02, or 05 winning is the same as that of the replay B1 table.
As described above, in the replay B1 to B5 table, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 05 is won in a specific pressing order and the replay 01 or 02 is awarded in a pressing order other than the specific pressing order. ing. As will be described later, when Replay 05 wins at RT1, the game moves to RT2 (promotion). Therefore, when one of the replays B1 to B5 is won during the RT1 game, if the stop switch is operated in a specific push order, the replay 05 can be won and the game can be shifted to RT2. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, RT1 is maintained without shifting to RT2.
Note that when the condition device numbers “3” to “6” are won, the replays 10 to 13 included in the winning combination are not won when the condition device is won. These replays 10 to 13 are used to increase the overlapping winning patterns of replays 01, 02, and 05 (control replay).

The replay C1 table is used in the game when the condition device number “7” is won (when the replays 03, 04, and 06 are overlapped), and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 06 is stopped on the active line, the replay 04 is stopped on the active line at the time of “left and right middle” or middle first stop, and the replay 03 is awarded at the first right stop. It is a thing.
First, when replay 06 is won, “black BAR”, “watermelon A”, and “replay A” of the left reel 31 are “PB = 1” in total, so they are always on the active line (lower left). Any of these symbols can be stopped. When “Black BAR” is stopped at the lower left, “Replay B” stops at the upper left. When “Watermelon A” is stopped at the lower left, “Replay A” stops at the upper left.

Further, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” is stopped on the active line (middle middle stage) (PB = 1). Further, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay B” is stopped on the active line (upper right) (PB = 1). If “Replay B” stops at the active line when the right reel 31 stops, “Replay A” stops at the lower right.
Therefore, at the time of winning Replay 06, “Replay A” — “Replay A” — “Replay B” stops on the active line, or “Lower left”, “Middle and middle” — “Replay A / Replay B” − “Replay A” − “Replay A” stops at the “lower stage”.

When winning the replay 04, when the left reel 31 is stopped, any one of “black BAR”, “replay A”, and “watermelon A” is stopped on the active line (lower left). However, No. 3 and No. 8 “Replay A” are controlled so as not to stop at the active line. By stopping “Watermelon A” of No. 1, 6, or 11 on the active line, it is possible not to stop “Replay A” of No. 3 and No. 8 on the active line.
By such stop control, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” or “Replay B” stops at the upper left.

Further, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, any one of “red 7”, “black BAR”, and “cherry” is stopped on the active line (middle middle stage). Since the middle reel 31 is arranged with “PB = 1” in the total of these three symbols, any of these symbols can always be stopped on the effective line (middle middle). As a result, “Replay A” stops in the upper middle part.
Further, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” is stopped on the active line (upper right stage) (PB = 1).
As a result, Replay 04 wins and “Replay A / Replay B” − “Replay A” − “Replay A” stops on the upper line (invalid line).

In order to win the replay 03, when the left reel 31 is stopped, either “Bell” or “Watermelon B” is stopped on the active line (lower left). However, control is performed so that No. 17 “bell” does not stop at the active line. By stopping the 14th or 19th “Watermelon B” on the effective line, it is possible to prevent the 17th “Bell” from stopping on the active line.
By such stop control, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” or “Replay B” stops in the middle left.

Further, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” is stopped on the active line (middle middle stage) (PB = 1).
Further, when the right reel 31 is stopped, any one of “red 7”, “black BAR”, “white BAR”, and “blank” is stopped on the active line (upper right). Since these four symbols are arranged in a “PB = 1” arrangement, any of these symbols can always be stopped on the active line. When any of these symbols stops on the active line, “Replay B” stops in the middle right.
As a result, Replay 03 wins and “Replay A / Replay B” − “Replay A” − “Replay B” stops on the middle line (invalid line).

The replay C2 table is used in a game when the condition device number “8” is won (when replays 03, 04, 06, and 10 are won simultaneously), and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, when the push order is “middle left and right” The reel 31 is set so that the replay 06 is stopped on the effective line, the replay 04 is stopped on the effective line at the time of “left middle right” or middle first stop, and the replay 03 is stopped on the effective line at the first right stop. The stop position is determined.
The replay C3 table is used in the game when the condition device number “9” is won (when the replays 03, 04, 06, and 11 are repeatedly won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the pressing order “middle left and right "Replay 06 is stopped on the effective line, and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 03 is stopped on the effective line except in the pressing order" middle left and right ".

Furthermore, the replay C4 table is used in a game when the condition device number “10” is won (when replays 03, 04, 06, and 12 are won simultaneously), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the push order “right and left” The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 06 is stopped on the effective line when “middle” and the replay 03 is stopped on the effective line except in the pressing order “middle right and left”.
Furthermore, the replay C5 table is used in a game when the condition device number “11” is won (when replays 03, 04, 06, and 13 are simultaneously won), and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the first right stop The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 06 is stopped at the effective line, the replay 03 is stopped at the effective line at the first left stop, and the replay 04 is stopped at the effective line at the middle first stop. It is.

In the replay C2 table to the replay C5 table, stop control at the time of replay 03, 04, or 06 winning is the same as the replay C1 table.
As described above, in the replay C1 to C5 table, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 06 is won in a specific pressing order and the replay 03 or 04 is awarded in a pressing order other than the specific pressing order. ing. As will be described later, when Replay 06 wins in RT2, the game moves to RT3 (promotion). Therefore, when one of the replays C1 to C5 is won during the RT2 game, if the stop switch is operated in a specific pushing order, the replay 06 can be won and a transition can be made to RT3. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, the process shifts to RT1 (falls) without shifting to RT3.
Note that when the condition device numbers “8” to “11” are won, the replays 10 to 13 included in the winning combination are not won when the condition device is won. These replays 10 to 13 are used as control replays to increase the overlapping winning patterns of replays 03, 04, and 06.

The replay D1 table is used in a game when the condition device number “12” is won (when replays 01, 02, 03, and 04 are duplicated), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the replay is performed at the first left stop. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that 01 is stopped on the active line, the replay 04 is stopped on the active line during the middle first stop, and the replay 03 is stopped on the active line during the first right stop. .
In addition, the replay D2 table is used in a game when the condition device number “13” is won (when replays 01, 02, 03, 04, and 10 are duplicated), and is within the range of stop control of the reel 31. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 02 is stopped on the active line when stopped, and the replay 03 is stopped on the active line when the first left or right stop.

  Furthermore, the replay D3 table is used in the game when the condition device number “14” is won (when the replays 01, 02, 03, 04, and 11 are repeatedly won), and within the range of the reel 31 stop control, The stop position of the reel 31 is set so that the replay 02 is stopped at the effective line at the time of one stop, the replay 03 is stopped at the effective line at the first left stop, and the replay 04 is stopped at the effective line at the middle first stop. It is determined.

In the replay D1 table to the replay D3 table, the stop position of the reel 31 is set so that the replay 01 or 02 is won in a specific pressing order and the replay 03 or 04 is won in a pressing order other than the specific pressing order. It has established. As will be described later, when Replay 01 or 02 wins at RT3, RT3 is maintained, but when Replay 03 or 04 wins, it shifts (falls) to RT1.
In the replay D1 table to the replay D3 table, stop control when winning replays 01, 02, 03, 04 is the same as described above.

  The replay E table is used in the game when the condition device number “15” is selected (when the replay 07 is selected independently), and the reel 31 is stopped so that the replay 07 is stopped at the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. This is a stop position determination table that determines a position and stops a so-called “weak cherry” (actually a replay) in appearance. In the replay E table, the pressing order is not required.

Here, the “weak cherry” refers to a stop outcome in which “cherry” is stopped at the upper left or lower left when the left reel 31 is stopped. On the other hand, as will be described later, the “strong cherry” refers to a stop outcome in which “cherry” is stopped in the middle left when the left reel 31 is stopped.
In the game where “cherry” can be stopped in the display window 11 when the left reel 31 is stopped, “cherry” is stopped in the display window 11 when the left reel 31 is stopped. It points to the stop when there was no.
In a game in which the condition device number “15” is won and the replay E table is used, the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that the weak cherry stops appear.
There are 32 combinations of symbols of the replay 07, such as role numbers “36” to “67” (FIGS. 21 and 22).

In the present embodiment, in the replay E table, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the symbol to be stopped (drawn) to the active line (lower left) with the first priority is set to “cherry”. Also, “Replay B” is set as the second priority.
If the “cherry” is stopped on the active line (lower left) when the left reel 31 is stopped, it looks like a so-called weak cherry (corner cherry) (actually a replay).
Also, if “Replay B” is stopped on the active line (lower left) when the left reel 31 is stopped, it will appear “cherry missed eyes” (actually, the replay wins with “PB = 1”). .

In the left reel 31, “Cherry” and “Replay B” have a total arrangement of “PB = 1”, so that any of these symbols can always be stopped at the effective line.
Furthermore, since “red 7” and “cherry” are arranged in “PB = 1” in the middle reel 31 (in the middle reel 31, “PB = 1” is arranged in “cherry” alone. ) It is always possible to stop any of these symbols on the active line.
Further, in the right reel 31, “red 7”, “black BAR”, “white BAR”, and “blank” are always arranged in the “PB = 1” arrangement of these four symbols, and therefore any one of these symbols is always provided. Can be stopped at the active line.

As described above, the replay 07 can be won by stopping “cherry / replay B” − “red 7 / cherry” − “red 7 / black BAR / white BAR / blank” on the active line.
For this reason, in the game using the replay E table, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “white BAR” or “blank” is not stopped on the active line (lower left). Thus, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the “cherry” (the so-called “middle cherry” in appearance) is not stopped at the left middle stage.

  The replay F table is used in the game when the condition device number “16” is selected (replay 07, 08, or 10), and any one of the replays 07, 08, or 10 is valid within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop at the line, and the so-called “strong cherry” is stopped in appearance (actually replay). However, as will be described later, there are cases where a weak cherry appears instead of a strong cherry. In the replay F table, the pressing order is not required.

In a game in which the Replay F table is used, at the time of the first left stop (in the case of forward pressing), the “Cherry” or “Replay B” is stopped at the lower left as in the case of the Replay E table. Control to stop “weak cherry” (replay 07 wins with “PB = 1”). At the time of the first left stop when the replay F table is used (at the time of forward pressing), the description is omitted because it is the same as the stop control in the replay E table.
On the other hand, at the time of middle or right first stop (when irregularly pressed), when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so that “cherry” is stopped at the left middle stage and apparent “strong cherry” is stopped. .

For example, when the middle reel 31 is stopped during irregular pressing, “cherry” is stopped on the active line (“PB = 1”). Further, when the right reel 31 is stopped when the irregular push is performed, “red 7”, “black BAR”, “white BAR”, and “blank” are stopped. In this stop type, any one of the role numbers “40” to “43”, “48” to “51”, “56” to “59”, and “64” to “67” can be stopped.
Next, when the left reel 31 is stopped during irregular pressing, priority is given to stopping “white BAR” or “blank” on the effective line (lower left) (first priority). If “White BAR” or “Blank” is stopped on the active line (lower left), “Strong Cherry” will be stopped and Replay 07 will be awarded.

Here, “white BAR” and “blank” are “PB ≠ 1” in total. Therefore, when “left BAR” or “blank” cannot be stopped on the active line when the left reel 31 is stopped when the irregular push is performed, “replay B” is stopped as the second priority. In the left reel 31, “PB = 1” is arranged by adding “white BAR”, “blank”, and “replay B” (4th, 9th, 14th, 19th). Therefore, when “white BAR” or “blank” cannot be stopped at the lower left stage, “replay B” can always be stopped at the lower left stage.
As described above, the irregular push when the Replay F table is used results in a “strong cherry” or “cherry missed eye”.

The replay G1 table is used in the game when the condition device number “17” is won (when replays 01, 02, 07, and 10 are won simultaneously), and within the range of the reel 31 stop control, at the left or middle first stop The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 07 is stopped on the active line and the replay 02 is stopped on the active line at the time of the first right stop.
The replays G1 to G3 as condition devices are called push order middle cherries. When the push order is correct, the apparent middle cherries (strong cherries) can be stopped, and when the push order is incorrect, “cherry” is displayed (display window 11). (Inside) Stop control is made to stop (make cherry spilled eyes).
In FIG. 28, in the replays G1 to G3 of the condition device numbers “17” to “19”, the “*” mark is in the correct answer pressing order to win the replay 07, and the others are the incorrect answer pressing order in the replay 01 Or win 02. For example, when the replay G1 is won, the left or middle first stop is set in the correct answer pressing order, and the right first stop is set in the incorrect answer pressing order.

In a game in which the replay G1 table is used, when the correct answer is in the pushing order (left or middle first stop), the replay 07 is stopped on the active line, and when the left reel 31 is stopped as in the replay F table. Priority is given to stopping “white BAR” or “blank” in the active line. This makes it possible to stop the apparent middle cherry. If “white BAR” or “blank” cannot be stopped on the active line when the left reel 31 is stopped, “cherry” or “replay B” is stopped on the active line as in the replay F table.
On the other hand, when the answer is the incorrect push order (first right stop), control is performed so that the replay 02 is won. Stop control at the time of Replay 02 winning is the same as that in the Replay A table.

The replay G2 table is used in the game when the condition device number “18” is won (when the replays 01, 02, 07, and 11 are duplicated), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the middle or right first stop The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 07 is stopped on the effective line (when the correct answer is in the pushing order) and the replay 01 is stopped at the effective line when the first left stop (when the answer is incorrect). is there.
The stop control at the time of replay 07 winning is the same as the replay G1 table. The stop control at the time of replay 01 winning is the same as that in the replay A table.
Similarly, the replay G3 table is used in the game when the condition device number “19” is won (when replays 01, 02, 07, 10, and 11 are duplicated), and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, The stop position of the reel 31 is such that the replay 07 is stopped on the active line at the right first stop (in the correct push order) and the replay 02 is stopped at the active line at the middle first stop (in the incorrect push order). Is defined.

Stop control at the time of replay 02 and 07 winning is the same as the above.
As described above, in the replay G1 to G3 tables, the middle cherries can be stopped by winning the replay 07 in a specific push order (when the push order is correct), and in the push orders other than the specific push order, the replay 01 Alternatively, the middle cherries are not stopped by winning 02.
In the replays G1 to G3, the replays 10 and 11 included in the winning combination are replays that are used for control, and are replays that do not win when the replay G1 table to the replay G3 table are used.

  The replay H1 table is used in the game when the condition device number “20” is won (when replays 01, 02, and 09 are duplicated), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the first left stop (push order correct answer) Replay 09 is stopped on the active line, during middle first stop (when pressing order is incorrect), replay 02 is stopped at the effective line, and when playing right first (when pressing order is incorrect), replay 01 is stopped. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop at the effective line.

The combination of symbols of Replay 09 is “bell”-“Replay A”-“Replay B” as shown by the role number “72” in FIG. 22, and each reel 31 is a symbol with “PB = 1” arrangement. is there. Therefore, replay 09 can always be won at the correct answer in the pressing order.
Further, the stop control at the time of replay 01 and 02 winning is the same as the replay A table.
Also in the following replay H2 table and replay H3 table, stop control at the time of replay 01, 02, 09 winning is the same as the replay H2 table.

The replay H2 table is used in a game when the condition device number “21” is won (when replays 01, 02, 09, and 10 are duplicated) and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 09 is stopped at the effective line (when the correct answer is in the pushing order) and the replay 01 is stopped at the effective line when the first stop is left or right (when the answer is incorrect). Is.
Furthermore, the replay H3 table is used in the game when the condition device number “22” is won (when the replays 01, 02, 09, and 11 are won simultaneously), and within the range of the reel 31 stop control, the right first stop Time (when the correct answer is pushed), replay 09 is stopped on the active line, and when the first left stop (when incorrect answer is pushed), replay 01 is stopped on the active line, and when middle first stop (when incorrect answer is pushed) ) Defines the stop position of the reel 31 so that the replay 02 is stopped at the effective line.

  As described above, in the replay H1 table to the replay H3 table, the replay 09 is awarded when the pressing order is correct, and the replay 01 or 02 is awarded when the pressing order is incorrect. Replay 09 is positioned as a chance in the present embodiment. The replays H1 to H3 are selected by lottery during RT3 (generally AT), and when the replays H1 to H3 are selected, AT is added (of the number of stocks) and the lottery is performed. Therefore, when the replay 09 appears in the AT, there is a possibility of adding the AT.

As described above, the small roles A1 to C6 (conditional device numbers “23” to “40”) win the so-called push order bells, and when these conditional devices are won, the following specific stop position determinations are made. The reel 31 is controlled to stop using a table.
The small role A1 table is used in the game when the condition device “23” is won (when the small roles 01, 04, 05 are simultaneously won), and “left middle right” (shown as “123” in FIG. 29). When the stop switch is operated in the correct answer pressing order, the small role 01 which is a nine-piece role is won with the priority given to the number, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in an incorrect answer pressing order other than “left middle right” The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that a small combination 04 or 05 which is a single combination is won in accordance with the number priority.

Here, as a method of stopping and controlling the reel 31 when a plurality of small combinations are simultaneously won (duplicate winning), the following methods can be mentioned.
As the first priority, when all of the symbols constituting the winning symbol combination (of the reel 31) can be stopped on the active line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to “stop all of the symbols that make up the winning symbol combination on the active line” (when the first priority cannot be adopted), the second priority is set to “number priority” ”Or“ number priority ”, the reel 31 is controlled to stop.
Here, the “number priority” is to stop (pull in) the symbol of the reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination having the largest number of payouts among the combinations of symbols that are selected in duplicate, with priority on the line. Say. For this reason, at the time of winning the small combinations A1 to C6, the small combinations 01 to 03 correspond to combinations of symbols having the largest number of payouts.
On the other hand, “number priority” means that the symbols on the reel 31 are stopped on the effective line so that the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the effective line is maximized.

When the condition device “23” is won and the first left stop is performed, for example, all of the left reels 31 related to the winning combination cannot be simultaneously stopped on the active line. This is because there are a plurality of types of symbols on the left reel 31 of the small roles 01, 04 and 05, but since there is only one effective line, only one type of symbol can be stopped on the effective line.
Therefore, in a game using the small role 1 table, the reel 31 is controlled to stop according to either the number priority or the number priority. In the present embodiment, the reels are controlled to stop with priority on the number of sheets when the correct answer is in the pressing order, and the reels 31 are controlled to stop with priority on the number when the answer is incorrect in the pressing order. In the present embodiment, when the reels are stopped and controlled with priority on the number, the nine-piece combination is not won, and the single-piece combination is won.
In the following small role A2 table to small role C6 table, similarly to the above, control is performed so that nine winning combinations in the winning combination are awarded when the correct answer is pressed, and priority is given when the answer is incorrect. Control to win a single winning combination.

In a game in which the small role A1 table is used, when the first left stop, the correct answer is the order of push. Therefore, the symbol of the left reel 31 relating to the small combination 01 which is the nine-piece combination is “bell” with priority given to the number of sheets, and therefore the “bell” is stopped at the lower left stage.
Next, at the time of the middle second stop, the correct push order is determined at this point. Therefore, any one of the symbols “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, and “blank”, which are the symbols of the middle reel 31 of the small role 01, is stopped at the effective line (middle middle stage). In the middle reel 31, “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, and “blank” are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols, so that “PB = 1” is arranged in total. Therefore, any of these four symbols can always be stopped on the effective line.
When “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, or “blank” is stopped in the middle and middle stages, “bell” is stopped in the middle and lower stages.

After the left first stop and the middle second stop, at the time of the third stop on the right, any one of “red 7”, “black BAR”, “white BAR”, and “blank” is stopped on the effective line (upper right stage). In the right reel 31, “Red 7”, “Black BAR”, “White BAR”, and “Blank” are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols, so that “PB = 1” is arranged in total. Therefore, any of these four symbols can always be stopped on the effective line.
When “Red 7”, “Black BAR”, “White BAR” or “Blank” is stopped at the upper right, “Bell” is stopped at the lower right.
As described above, when winning the small role 01, “bell”-“bell”-“bell” stops on the lower line (invalid line).

After the first stop on the left and the second stop on the right, the incorrect answer in the pressing order is determined at the second stop.
Here, the combination of symbols of the small role 04 or 05 whose symbol of the left reel 31 is “bell” is the small role 05 of the role numbers “104” to “107” in FIG. Therefore, in order to win the small role 05, when the right reel 31 is stopped, the “bell” is stopped on the active line (upper right).

Further, at the time of the middle third stop, as shown in the role numbers “104” to “107” in FIG. 24, any one of “White BAR”, “Watermelon A”, “Watermelon B”, and “Blank” is an effective line. Stop at (middle middle). In the middle reel 31, “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, and “blank” are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols, so that “PB = 1” is arranged in total. Therefore, any of these four symbols can always be stopped on the effective line. Further, when “White BAR”, “Watermelon A”, “Watermelon B” or “Blank” stops in the middle and middle stages, “Bell” stops in the middle and lower stages.
Therefore, at the time of right-and-left middle push order correct answer, it is possible to win the small role 05 with “PB = 1”.
If the small role 05 is won as described above, a so-called “bell” break is displayed. Specifically, the “bell” stops at “lower left” − “lower middle” − “upper right”.

Next, in the game in which the small combination A1 table is used, when the middle first stop is performed, the push order is incorrect at this point, so control is performed so that the small combination is won with priority on the number.
Here, in the small roles 01, 04, and 05, the types and the number of symbols of the middle reel 31 are
“White BAR”: 5 “Watermelon A”: 5 “Watermelon B”: 5 “Blank”: 5 “Bell”: 6
Therefore, when priority is given to the number at the middle first stop, the “bell” is stopped at the effective line (middle middle). When the “bell” is stopped on the active line during the middle first stop, the winning combination is the small role 04. Therefore, even when the left and right stops thereafter, the small role 04 is controlled to win.

Specifically, as shown in the role numbers “98” to “103” in FIG. 24, the symbol of the right reel 31 of the small role 04 is only “bell”. Stop the “bell” on the stage.
Furthermore, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the symbols that can be stopped on the active line (lower left) are “red 7”, “white BAR”, “bell”, “replay A”, “cherry”, or “blank”. is there.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, control is performed so that “cherry” is not stopped in the display window 11 when a weak cherry or a strong cherry is not won. Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped, any one of “Red 7”, “Bell”, and “Replay A” (except for No. 8) can be stopped. Here, since the “bell” of the left reel 31 has the “PB = 1” arrangement, it is possible to determine that only the “bell” is stopped.
Further, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “PB = 1” can be used to stop the “bell”.

From the above, during the middle first stop (whether middle left or right or middle right left), the small role 04 wins with “PB = 1”.
Here, when the “bell” is stopped at the effective line (lower left) when the left reel 31 is stopped, “bell”-“bell”-“bell” stops at the effective line. Alternatively, when “red 7” is stopped on the active line (lower left) when the left reel 31 is stopped, a so-called “bell” misalignment is displayed in “left middle” — “middle middle” — “upper right”. .

Next, in the game using the small combination A1 table, when the right first stop, the push order is incorrect at this point, so control is performed so that the small combination is won with priority on the number.
Here, in the small roles 01, 04, and 05, the types and numbers of the symbols on the right reel 31 are:
“Red 7”: 4 “Black BAR”: 4 “White BAR”: 4 “Blank”: 4 “Bell”: 10
Therefore, when priority is given to the number at the right first stop, the “bell” is stopped on the active line (upper right).

  Next, at the time of the second left stop, the number of symbol combinations that are the largest at that time is that the “bell” is stopped on the active line, so that the “bell” is stopped on the active line (lower left). . Then, at the time of the middle third stop, control is performed to stop any of “White BAR”, “Watermelon A”, “Watermelon B”, and “Blank” on the active line (middle middle stage) and win the small role 05 . Thereby, the small role 05 can be won with “PB = 1”. Further, a so-called “bell” break is displayed in the same way as in the middle of pressing.

  On the other hand, in the middle second stop after the right first stop, the largest number of symbol combinations at that time is to stop the “bell” on the active line. Stop "Bell". Then, at the time of the third stop on the left, control is performed so that “bell” or “red 7” is stopped on the active line (lower left), and the small role 04 is won.

The small role A2 table is used in the game when the condition device number “24” is won (when overlapping the small roles 01, 04, 06), and “middle” (shown as “132” in FIG. 29). When the stop switch is operated in the correct answer pressing order, the small role 01 which is a nine-piece role is won with the priority given to the number, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect answer pressing order other than “left and right middle” The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the small combination 04 or 06 which is a single combination is won by priority.
In a game in which the small combination A2 table is used, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order, the small combination 01 can be won by giving priority to the number of pieces as in the small combination A1 table.

In addition, after the first stop on the left and the second stop on the middle, the incorrect answer in the pressing order is determined at this point. And since the one-piece combination whose symbol of the left reel 31 is “Bell” is the small combination 06, the small combination 06 is controlled to win at the middle second stop and the right third stop.
Here, the “bell” of the middle reel 31 is “PB = 1”. Furthermore, as described above, “red 7”, “black BAR”, “white BAR”, and “blank” of the right reel 31 have a total arrangement of “PB = 1”. Therefore, the small role 06 can always be won.
When “Right 7”, “Black BAR”, “White BAR” or “Blank” is stopped at the active line (upper right) when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Bell” stops at the middle right.
As a result, at the time of winning the small role 06, the “bell” stops at “lower left” − “middle right” − “lower right” (“bell” breakage).

On the other hand, in a game in which the small combination A2 table is used, the middle order is stopped at this point, so that the push order is incorrect.
Here, in the small roles 01, 04, 06, the types and the number of symbols of the middle reel 31 are:
“White BAR”: 4 “Watermelon A”: 4 “Watermelon B”: 4 “Blank”: 4 “Bell”: 10

  Therefore, when priority is given to the number at the time of the middle first stop, “bell” is stopped at the effective line. Next, at the time of the second stop on the left, the largest number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the active line at that time is to stop the `` bell '' on the effective line. Stop the “bell” on the active line. Then, at the time of the third stop on the right, control is performed so that “red 7”, “black BAR”, “white BAR” or “blank” is stopped and the small role 06 is won. The stop control of the small role 06 is the same as described above.

  On the other hand, after the middle first stop, at the time of the second stop on the right, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the active line at that time is the largest because the “bell” is stopped on the active line. At the second stop, the “bell” is stopped on the active line. When the left reel 31 is stopped, “Red 7”, “White BAR”, “Bell”, “Replay A”, “Cherry”, or “Blank” is stopped to win the small role 04. Control. The stop control of the small role 04 is the same as described above.

Further, in a game using the small combination A2 table, when the first stop on the right is reached, the push order is incorrect at this point, so control is performed so that the small combination is won with priority on the number.
Here, in the small roles 01, 04, and 06, the types and numbers of the symbols on the right reel 31 are as follows:
“Red 7”: 5 “Black BAR”: 5 “White BAR”: 5 “Blank”: 5 “Bell”: 6
Therefore, when priority is given to the number at the right first stop, the “bell” is stopped on the active line (upper right).
At this time, since only the small role 04 can be stopped on the active line, at the time of the left and middle stops, the combination of the symbols of the small role 04 stops on the active line, respectively, 31 is controlled to stop. The stop control at the time of winning the small role 04 is the same as described above.

The small role A3 table is used in a game when the condition device number “25” is won (when overlapping the small roles 02, 04, 05), and “middle left and right” (shown as “213” in FIG. 29). When the stop switch is operated in the correct answer pressing order, the small role 02 which is a nine-piece role is won by the number priority, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in any other incorrect answer pressing order, the number priority is set to 1. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the small combination 04 or 05 which is a double combination is won.
In a game in which the small role A3 table is used, when the middle first stop is the correct answer in the pushing order at this point, the “bell” which is the symbol related to the middle reel 31 of the small role 02 is set to the active line (middle middle). Stop.

Next, at the time of the second stop at the left, the correct push order is determined at this point. Therefore, in order to win the small role 02, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “red 7” or “watermelon A” is stopped on the active line (lower left). In the left reel 31, “Red 7” and “Watermelon A” have a total arrangement of “PB = 1”. When “Red 7” or “Watermelon A” is stopped in the lower left row, “Bell” is stopped in the left middle row.
Further, at the time of the third stop on the right, “Replay B” is stopped on the active line (upper right). When “Replay B” is stopped at the upper right, “Bell” is stopped at the middle right.
As a result, the small role 02 wins, and “bell”-“bell”-“bell” stops at the middle stage line (invalid line).

  On the other hand, after the middle first stop, at the time of the second stop on the right, the push order is incorrect at this point, so the number priority is switched. Since the symbol of the middle reel 31 is “bell” and the symbol of the right reel 31 is also “bell”, the small role 05 is controlled, so that the small role 05 is controlled to win. The second right stop and the third left stop for winning the small role 05 are the same as in the small role 05 winning described above.

In the game using the small role A3 table, when the first stop is left, the push order is incorrect at this point, so stop control based on the number priority is performed.
“Bell” is the most common symbol of the left reel 31 in the small roles 02, 04, and 05. Therefore, at the time of the first left stop, the “bell” is stopped at the active line. As a result, it is possible to win the small combination 04 (the combination number “100”) and the small combination 05. At the time of the second stop, the “bell” having the largest number of symbols is activated. Also, at the time of the third stop on the right, the “bell” is stopped on the active line, and the small role 04 is won.

  Further, after the first stop on the left and the second stop on the right, the “bell” having the largest number of symbols is made to be an effective line. Next, at the middle third stop, stop the “bell” to win the small role 04 and stop any of “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, or “blank”. In the present embodiment, the control is performed so that the small role 05 is awarded. The stop control of the reel 31 in this case is the same as described above.

Similarly, in a game in which the small role A3 table is used, when the right first stop is performed, the push order is incorrect at this time, so stop control with priority on the number is performed.
“Bell” is the most common symbol of the left reel 31 in the small roles 02, 04, and 05. Therefore, at the first stop on the right, the “bell” is stopped on the active line. As a result, the small combination 04 (the combination number “100”) and the small combination 05 can be awarded in the same manner as described above. At the time of the second stop, the “bell” having the largest number of symbols is activated. Also, at the time of the third stop on the right, the “bell” is stopped on the active line, and the small role 04 is won.

  The small role A4 table is used in the game when the condition device number “26” is won (when the small role 02, 04, 06 is overlapped) and “middle right left” (shown as “231” in FIG. 29). When the stop switch is operated in the correct answer pressing order, the small role 02 which is a nine-piece role is won by the number priority, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in any other incorrect answer pressing order, the number priority is set to 1. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the small combination 04 or 06 which is a double combination is won.

In a game in which the small role A4 table is used, the middle and first stops are correct in the pushing order at this point, so the “bell” symbol of the middle reel 31 related to the small role 02 is activated (middle middle). To stop. Further, when the right second stop is performed, the correct answer in the pushing order is determined at this time, so that “Replay B” is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped.
Furthermore, at the time of the third stop on the left, “red 7” or “watermelon A” is stopped on the active line (lower left) (PB = 1).
As described above, the small role 02 can be won with “PB = 1” in the correct answer in the pressing order.

  On the other hand, in the game using the small role A4 table, after the middle first stop and the second left stop, an incorrect answer in the pressing order is determined at that time, so the priority is switched from the number priority to the number priority. For this reason, at the time of the second stop at the left, the “bell” is stopped at the effective line (lower left). And at the time of the third stop on the right, it is possible to stop any of “Bell” relating to the small role 04 or “Red 7”, “Black BAR”, “White BAR”, or “Blank” relating to the small role 06. In this embodiment, the “bell” is stopped in order to win the small role 04.

Also, in the game using the small role A4 table, when the first left stop, the push order is incorrect at this point, so “bell” is stopped on the active line with priority on the number. At the time of the second stop, the “bell” is stopped at the active line. Furthermore, at the time of the third stop on the right, either the small role 04 or 06 can be won, but in this embodiment, the small role 04 is won.
On the other hand, at the time of the second stop on the right after the first stop on the left, any of “Bell” relating to the small role 04 or “Red 7”, “Black BAR”, “White BAR”, or “Blank” relating to the small role 06 In this embodiment, the “bell” is stopped to win the small role 04. Therefore, at the time of the middle third stop, the “bell” is stopped at the effective line.

Furthermore, in the game using the small role A4 table, when the middle first stop is performed, an incorrect answer in the pressing order is determined at this time, so the middle reel 31 is controlled to stop with priority on the number. Among the small roles 02, 04, and 06, the symbol having the maximum number of symbol combinations on the middle reel 31 is “bell”, so “bell” is stopped at the active line.
Next, after the middle first stop, when it is the left second stop, the “bell” is stopped with priority on the number. Thereby, since the small role 06 can be won, the symbol related to the small role 06 is stopped at the time of the third right stop.
On the other hand, after the middle first stop, when it is the second right stop, the “bell” is stopped according to the number priority. As a result, since the small role 04 can be won, the symbols related to the small role 04 are stopped in the same way as described above at the time of the third right stop.

  The small role A5 table is used in the game when the condition device number “27” is won (when overlapping the small roles 03, 04, 06), and “middle right” (shown as “312” in FIG. 29). When the stop switch is operated in the correct answer pressing order, the small role 03 which is a nine-piece role is won by the number priority, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in any other incorrect answer pressing order, the number priority is set to 1. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the small combination 04 or 06 which is a double combination is won.

  In a game in which a small role A5 table is used, the correct answer is the pushing order at the time of the right first stop, so the “bell” which is the symbol of the right reel 31 related to the small role 03 is the active line (upper right) To stop. Further, when the second left stop is performed, the correct answer in the pushing order is determined at this time, so that when the left reel 31 is stopped, “Replay B” or “Cherry” (“PB = 1” in total) is stopped on the active line. Further, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the “cherry” is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the game using the small role A5 table, after the first stop on the right ("Bell") and the second stop in the middle, the incorrect push order is determined at that time, so the priority is switched from the number priority to the number priority. For this reason, the “bell” is stopped at the time of the second stop. The small role that can be won at this time is the small role 04. Accordingly, at the time of the third stop on the left, the predetermined symbol of the small role 04 is stopped on the active line in the same manner as described above.

Furthermore, in the game using the small role A5 table, when the first left stop, the incorrect push order is determined at this time, so the left reel 31 is controlled to stop with priority on the number. Among the small roles 03, 04, and 06, the symbol having the maximum number of symbol combinations on the left reel 31 is “bell”, so “bell” is stopped at the active line.
Next, after the first left stop ("bell"), when the second stop is middle, the "bell" is stopped with priority on the number. Furthermore, at the time of the third stop on the right, either the small role 04 or 06 can be won, but in this embodiment, the small role 04 is won.
On the other hand, after the first stop on the left ("Bell"), when the second stop is on the right, either the small role 04 or 06 can be won, but in this embodiment, the small role 06 is controlled to win. To do. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, any of the symbols “red 7”, “black BAR”, “white BAR”, or “blank” is stopped, and “bell” is stopped at the effective line when the third and third stops. Let

Further, in the game using the small role A5 table, when the middle / first stop, the incorrect answer in the pressing order is determined at this time, so the left reel 31 is controlled to stop with priority on the number. Among the small roles 03, 04, and 06, the symbol having the maximum number of symbol combinations on the middle reel 31 is “bell”, so “bell” is stopped at the active line.
Next, after the middle first stop ("bell"), when the second stop is on the left, the "bell" is stopped according to the number priority. Furthermore, at the time of the third stop on the right, either the small role 04 or 06 can be won, but in this embodiment, the small role 04 is won.
On the other hand, when the second stop is on the right after the middle first stop ("Bell"), either the small role 04 or 06 can be won, but in this embodiment, the small role 06 is controlled to win. To do. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, any of the symbols “red 7”, “black BAR”, “white BAR”, or “blank” is stopped, and “bell” is stopped at the effective line when the third and third stops. Let

The small role A6 table is used in the game when the condition device number “28” is won (when overlapping the small roles 03, 04, and 05), and “right middle left” (“321” in FIG. 29) is displayed. ), When the stop switch is operated in the correct answer pressing order, the small role 03 which is a nine-piece role is won by the number priority, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in any other incorrect pressing order, the number priority is given. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the small combination 04 or 05 which is a single piece combination is won.
In a game in which the small role A6 table is used, at the time of the first stop on the right, the pushing order is correct at this time, so that the “bell” is stopped when the right reel 31 is stopped.
Furthermore, after the first stop on the right, the correct answer in the pushing order is determined at this point in the middle and second stops, so that “cherry” is stopped on the active line so that the small role 03 is won. Further, at the time of the third stop on the left, “Replay B” or “Red 7” is stopped on the active line. Thereby, the small role 03 wins a prize.

  On the other hand, after the first stop on the right ("Bell"), when the second stop on the left, the incorrect answer in the pressing order is determined at this point, so the number priority is switched. Thus, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the “bell” is stopped on the effective line. Further, at the time of the middle third stop, in order to win the small role 05, one of “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, or “blank” is stopped on the active line.

In the game using the small role A6 table, when the first left stop, the incorrect answer in the pressing order is determined at this time, so the left reel 31 is controlled to stop with priority on the number. Since the symbol having the largest number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the active line is “bell”, “bell” is stopped on the active line. Furthermore, at the time of the second or second stop, either the small role 04 or the small role 05 can be stopped on the active line, but in this embodiment, the small role 05 is controlled to win.
After the first stop on the left, at the second stop on the right, the “bell” is stopped on the effective line with priority on the number. Further, at the time of the middle third stop, either the small role 04 or 05 can be stopped on the active line, but in this embodiment, the small role 05 is controlled to win.

  In a game in which the small combination A6 table is used, when the middle first stop is performed, an incorrect answer in the pressing order is determined at this time, so the middle reel 31 is controlled to stop with priority on the number. Since the symbol having the largest number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the active line is “bell”, “bell” is stopped on the active line. When the “bell” is stopped on the active line during the middle first stop, the small role that can be won is the small role 04. Therefore, when the left and right reels 31 are stopped, A predetermined symbol is stopped on the active line.

The small combination B1 table to small combination B6 table described below are the same as the small combination A1 table to small combination A6 table, respectively. However, the small role 07 included in the condition devices “29” to “34” is a small role for controlling the conditional device, and is awarded in a game using the small role B1 table to the small role B6 table. There is no. In particular, the small role 07 can win a prize when the condition device “50” is won as a strong chance.
The small role B1 table is used when the condition device “29” is selected, and when the correct answer pressing order is “left middle right (123)”, the small role 01 is won by the number priority, and in the other pressing order, the number priority is given. Win a small role 04 or 05.
The small role B2 table is used when the condition device “30” is selected, and when the correct answer pressing order is “left / right / middle (132)”, the small role 01 is won by the number priority, and in the other pressing order the number priority is small. Win a role 04 or 06.

The small role B3 table is used when the condition device “31” is selected, and when the correct answer push order is “middle left and right (213)”, the small role 02 is won by the number priority, and in the other push orders, the small number is given by the number priority. Win a role 04 or 05.
The small role B4 table is used when the condition device “32” is selected, and when the correct answer is “middle right left (231)”, the small role 02 is won by the number priority, and in the other pressing order, the small number is given by the number priority. Win a role 04 or 06.
The small role B5 table is used when the condition device “33” is selected. When the right answer is “right / left middle (312)”, the small role 03 is won by the number priority, and in the other pressing order, the small number is given by the number priority. Win a role 04 or 06.
The small role B6 table is used when the condition device “34” is selected. When the right answer is “right middle left (321)”, the small role 03 is won by the number priority, and in the other pressing order, the number priority is given. Win a small role 04 or 05.

Further, the small combination C1 table to small combination C6 table described below are the same as the small combination A1 table to small combination A6 table, respectively. However, the small role 08 included in the condition devices “35” to “40” is a small role for controlling the conditional device, and is awarded in a game using the small role C1 table to the small role C6 table. There is no. As a strong chance, the small role 08 can be awarded when the condition device “50” is won.
The small role C1 table is used when the condition device “35” is selected. When the correct answer is “left middle right (123)”, the small role 01 is won by the number priority, and in the other pressing order, the number priority is given. Win a small role 04 or 05.
The small role C2 table is used when the condition device “36” is elected, and when the correct answer pressing order is “left and right middle (132)”, the small role 01 is won by the number priority, and in the other pressing order, the small number is determined by the number priority. Win a role 04 or 06.

The small role C3 table is used when the condition device “37” is selected, and when the correct answer is “middle left and right (213)”, the small role 02 is won by the number priority, and in the other pressing order, the small number is given by the number priority. Win a role 04 or 05.
The small role C4 table is used when the condition device “38” is selected, and when the correct answer is “middle right left (231)”, the small role 02 is won by the number priority, and in the other press orders, the number priority is small. Win a role 04 or 06.
The small role C5 table is used when the condition device “39” is selected. When the right answer is “right / left middle (312)”, the small role 03 is won by the number priority, and in the other pressing order, the small number is given by the number priority. Win a role 04 or 06.
The small role C6 table is used when the condition device “40” is selected, and when the right answer is “right middle left (321)”, the small role 03 is won by the number priority, and in the other pressing order, the number priority is given. Win a small role 04 or 05.

  In the small role B1 table to the small role C6 table, the stop control of the small roles 01 to 03 when the number priority is given and the stop control of the small roles 04 to 06 when the number is given priority are the small role A1 table to the small role A6 table. It is the same.

The small role D table is used in the game when the condition device “41” is won (when the small role 01, 02, 03 is overlapped), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the small role 01, 02, or 03 The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that either one is won.
The small role D table allows one of small roles 01 to 03 to be awarded regardless of the pressing order. Here, for example, in a game using the small role D table, the small role 01 is won at the first left stop, the small role 02 is awarded at the middle first stop, and the small role 03 is awarded at the right first stop. It is also possible. In this embodiment, when the condition device “41” is won, it is positioned as a bell for performing the AT lottery, and since the “bell” alignment is visible on the middle line (invalid line), the small role 02 is awarded regardless of the pressing order. To control.

Each of the small role E1 table to the small role E3 table wins three small roles with “PB = 1” when the correct answer is in the pressing order, and wins three small roles with “PB ≠ 1” when the incorrect answer is in the pressing order. Alternatively, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the specific symbol is stopped and displayed.
The small role E1 table is used in a game when the condition device “42” is won (when the small roles 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 17 are simultaneously selected), and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the condition device The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that any of the small roles included in can be won and a specific symbol is displayed when the small role is missed.

  Here, all of the condition devices “42” to “44” are duplicate winnings of three small combinations. Therefore, in the condition devices “42” to “44”, the number of small combinations to be won in duplicate is the same. Therefore, in the small combination E1 table to the small combination E3 table, the reel 31 can be controlled to stop without performing the number priority / number priority stop control. In the present embodiment, it is determined that the “bell” is stopped on the active line at the time of the first stop.

In a game using the small role E1 table, at the time of the first left stop, the “bell” is stopped at the active line (lower left). Thereby, the small combination that can be won at the time of the first stop on the left becomes the small combination 09-12.
In addition, after the first left stop, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, one of “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, or “blank” is stopped. In the middle reel 31, these four symbols are added together in a “PB = 1” arrangement, so that any of these symbols can always be stopped on the effective line.
Further, after the first left stop, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay B” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1).
Therefore, in the game using the small role E1 table, at the time of the first left stop, any of the small roles 09 to 12 wins with “PB = 1”, and the specific symbol is not stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, in a game in which the small role E1 table is used, at the time of the middle first stop, the “bell” is stopped at the active line (middle middle). Thereby, the small combination that can be won at the middle first stop time becomes the small combination 13.
Then, when the left reel 31 stops after the middle first stop, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” related to the small role 13 is stopped on the effective line. Since “watermelon A” and “watermelon B” in the left reel 31 have a combined “PB = 1” arrangement, any one of these symbols can always be stopped at the active line.

  In addition, when the right reel 31 stops after the middle first stop, “red 7” related to the small role 13 is stopped on the active line. Since “red 7” of the right reel 31 is only one, “PB ≠ 1”. Furthermore, in the case of one arrangement among the number of symbols “20”, it is possible to stop at the active line within a maximum of 4 symbols (total of 5 symbols) in addition to the symbol. Therefore, the probability that “red 7” can be stopped on the active line when the right stop switch 42 is randomly operated is “1/4”.

On the other hand, when the right reel 31 is stopped after the middle first stop, if “red 7” cannot be stopped on the active line, “replay A” is stopped on the active line. As a result, when “red 7” of the right reel 31 is dropped, the combination of symbols on the active line becomes “watermelon A / watermelon B”-“bell”-“replay A”, and the specific symbol 02 stops.
Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop, the small role 13 (probability “1/4”) or the specific symbol 02 (probability “3/4”) stops.

In the game using the small role E1 table, the “bell” is stopped on the active line (upper right) at the time of the first right stop. Thus, the small combination that can be won at the time of the first stop on the right is the small combination 17.
Then, when the left reel 31 stops after the first right stop, the “black BAR”, “watermelon A”, or “watermelon B” related to the small role 17 is stopped on the active line. Since “black BAR”, “watermelon A”, and “watermelon B” in the left reel 31 have a combined “PB = 1” arrangement (only “watermelon A” and “watermelon B” have a “PB = 1” arrangement) Any one of these symbols can always be stopped on the active line.

Further, when the middle reel 31 is stopped after the right first stop, the “white BAR” related to the small role 17 is stopped on the active line. Since there is only one “white BAR” in the middle reel 31, “PB ≠ 1”. Accordingly, similarly to the above, the probability that “white BAR” can be stopped on the active line when the middle stop switch 42 is randomly operated is “1/4”.
On the other hand, when the middle reel 31 is stopped after the right first stop, if “white BAR” cannot be stopped on the active line, “cherry” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1). Accordingly, when the “white BAR” of the middle reel 31 is dropped, the combination of symbols on the active line becomes “black BAR / watermelon A / watermelon B” − “cherry” − “bell”, and the specific symbol 03 stops. .
Therefore, at the time of the first stop on the right, the small role 17 (probability “1/4”) or the specific symbol 03 (probability “3/4”) stops.

The small role E2 table is used in a game when the condition device “43” is won (when the small roles 09, 10, 11, 12, 14, and 18 are simultaneously selected), and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the condition device The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that any of the small roles included in can be won and a specific symbol is displayed when the small role is missed.
In the reel stop control at the time of the first left stop, as in the small role E1 table, the small roles 09 to 12 are awarded with “PB = 1”.
At the middle first stop, the “bell” is stopped at the active line.
Further, when the left reel 31 is stopped after the middle first stop, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the effective line. In the left reel 31, “watermelon A” and “watermelon B” are “PB = 1” in total, so that any of these symbols can always be stopped at the active line.
Therefore, at the time of the first left stop, the small roles 09 to 12 can be won with “PB = 1”.

Furthermore, when the right reel 31 stops after the middle first stop, the “black BAR” is stopped on the active line. In the left reel 31, the “black BAR” related to the small part 14 is stopped at the active line. Since there is only one “black BAR” on the right reel 31, “PB ≠ 1”. Accordingly, similarly to the above, the probability that “black BAR” can be stopped at the active line when the middle stop switch 42 is randomly operated is “1/4”.
On the other hand, at the time of stopping the right reel 31 after the middle first stop, if “black BAR” cannot be stopped on the active line, “replay A” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1). As a result, when the “black BAR” of the right reel 31 is dropped, the symbol combination on the active line is “watermelon A / watermelon B” − “bell” − “replay A”, and the specific symbol 02 stops.
Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop, the small role 14 (probability “1/4”) or the specific symbol 02 (probability “3/4”) stops.

In the game using the small role E2 table, the “bell” is stopped at the active line at the first stop on the right.
Further, when the left reel 31 is stopped after the first right stop, “black BAR”, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the effective line. In the left reel 31, “watermelon A” and “watermelon B” are “PB = 1” in total, so that any of these symbols can always be stopped at the active line.

Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped after the first right stop, “watermelon A” is stopped on the effective line. Since there is only one “watermelon A” in the middle reel 31, “PB ≠ 1”. Therefore, similarly to the above, the probability that “watermelon A” can be stopped on the active line when the middle stop switch 42 is randomly operated is “1/4”. .
On the other hand, if “watermelon A” cannot be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped after the right first stop, “cherry” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1). As a result, when “watermelon A” of the middle reel 31 is dropped, the combination of symbols on the active line becomes “black BAR / watermelon A / watermelon B” − “cherry” − “bell”, and the specific symbol 03 stops. .
Therefore, at the time of the first stop on the right, the small role 18 (probability “1/4”) or the specific symbol 03 (probability “3/4”) stops.

The small role E3 table is used in the game when the condition device “44” is won (when the small roles 09, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19 are overlapped), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the condition device The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that any of the small roles included in can be won and a specific symbol is displayed when the small role is missed.
First, during the middle first stop, the “bell” is stopped at the active line.
Further, when the left reel 31 is stopped after the middle first stop, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the effective line (PB = 1).

Furthermore, when the right reel 31 stops after the middle first stop, “red 7”, “black BAR”, “blank”, or “white BAR” is stopped on the effective line. In the right reel 31, these four symbols are arranged at intervals of five symbols, and the total is "PB = 1". Therefore, one of the symbols can always be stopped at the active line.
Therefore, in the game using the small role E3 table, at the time of the middle first stop, any of the small roles 13 to 16 wins with “PB = 1”.

In the game using the small role E3 table, at the time of the first left stop, the “bell” is stopped on the active line.
Further, when the middle reel 31 is stopped after the first left stop, “white BAR” is stopped on the active line (probability “1/4”), and when “white BAR” cannot be stopped on the active line, “ "Bell" is stopped at the active line ("3/4").
Furthermore, when the right reel 31 stops after the first left stop, “Replay B” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1).
Therefore, at the time of the first left stop, the small role 09 (probability “1/4”) or the specific symbol 01 (probability “3/4”) stops.

Furthermore, in a game in which the small role E3 table is used, at the time of the first stop on the right, the “bell” is stopped on the active line.
Then, when the left reel 31 stops after the first right stop, “black BAR”, “watermelon A”, or “watermelon B” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1).
Further, when the middle reel 31 is stopped after the right first stop, “watermelon B” is stopped on the effective line and stopped on the effective line (probability “1/4”), and “white BAR” is stopped on the effective line. When it is not possible, “cherry” is stopped at the active line (probability “3/4”).
Therefore, at the time of the first stop on the right, the small role 19 (probability “1/4”) or the specific symbol 03 (probability “3/4”) stops.

The small role E4 table is used in a game when the condition device “45” is won (when the small roles 10, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 20 are simultaneously selected), and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the condition device The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that any of the small roles included in can be won and a specific symbol is displayed when the small role is missed.
First, during the middle first stop, the “bell” is stopped at the active line.
Further, when the left reel 31 is stopped after the middle first stop, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the effective line (PB = 1).
Furthermore, when the right reel 31 stops after the middle first stop, “red 7”, “black BAR”, “blank”, or “white BAR” is stopped on the active line (total “PB = 1”). .
Therefore, in a game using the small role E4 table, at the time of the middle first stop, any of the small roles 13 to 16 wins with “PB = 1”.

In the game using the small role E4 table, the “bell” is stopped at the active line at the first left stop.
When the middle reel 31 stops after the first left stop, “watermelon A” is stopped on the effective line (probability “1/4”), and when “watermelon A” cannot be stopped on the effective line, “ "Bell" is stopped at the active line (probability "3/4").
Furthermore, when the right reel 31 stops after the first left stop, “Replay B” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1).
Therefore, at the time of the first left stop, the small role 10 (probability “1/4”) or the specific symbol 01 (probability “3/4”) stops.

Furthermore, in the game using the small role E4 table, the “bell” is stopped at the active line at the time of the first stop on the right.
Then, when the left reel 31 stops after the first right stop, “black BAR”, “watermelon A”, or “watermelon B” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1).
Further, when the middle reel 31 is stopped after the right first stop, “blank” is stopped on the active line and is stopped on the active line (probability “1/4”), and “blank” is stopped on the active line. If it cannot, stop “Cherry” on the active line (probability “3/4”).
Therefore, at the time of the first stop on the right, the small role 20 (probability “1/4”) or the specific symbol 03 (probability “3/4”) stops.

The small role E5 table is used in a game when the condition device “46” is won (when the small roles 11, 15, 17, 18, 19, and 20 are won simultaneously), and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the condition device The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that any of the small roles included in can be won and a specific symbol is displayed when the small role is missed.
First, at the first stop on the right, the “bell” is stopped on the active line.
Further, when the left reel 31 stops after the first right stop, “black BAR”, “watermelon A”, or “watermelon B” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1).

Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped after the first stop on the right, “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, or “blank” is stopped on the active line (total “PB = 1”). .
Therefore, in a game using the small role E5 table, at the time of the first right stop, any of the small roles 17 to 20 wins with “PB = 1”.

In the game using the small role E5 table, the “bell” is stopped at the active line at the time of the first stop at the left.
When the middle reel 31 stops after the first left stop, “watermelon B” is stopped on the effective line (probability “1/4”), and when “watermelon B” cannot be stopped on the effective line, “ "Bell" is stopped at the active line (probability "3/4").
Furthermore, when the right reel 31 stops after the first left stop, “Replay B” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1).
Therefore, at the time of the first left stop, the small part 11 (probability “1/4”) or the specific symbol 01 (probability “3/4”) stops.

Furthermore, in a game in which the small role E5 table is used, the “bell” is stopped on the active line at the middle / first stop.
Then, when the left reel 31 stops after the middle first stop, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1).
In addition, when the right reel 31 is stopped after the middle first stop, “blank” is stopped on the active line and is stopped on the active line (probability “1/4”), and “blank” is stopped on the active line. If not, “Replay A” is stopped on the active line (probability “3/4”).
Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop, the small role 15 (probability “1/4”) or the specific symbol 02 (probability “3/4”) stops.

The small role E6 table is used in a game when the condition device “47” is won (when the small roles 12, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 are simultaneously selected), and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the condition device The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that any of the small roles included in can be won and a specific symbol is displayed when the small role is missed.
First, at the first stop on the right, the “bell” is stopped on the active line.
Further, when the left reel 31 stops after the first right stop, “black BAR”, “watermelon A”, or “watermelon B” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1).
Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped after the first stop on the right, “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, or “blank” is stopped on the active line (total “PB = 1”). .
Therefore, in a game using the small role E6 table, at the time of the first right stop, any of the small roles 17 to 20 wins with “PB = 1”.

In the game using the small role E6 table, the “bell” is stopped at the active line at the time of the first stop on the left.
When the middle reel 31 is stopped after the first left stop, “blank” is stopped on the effective line (probability “1/4”), and “bell” is displayed when “blank” cannot be stopped on the effective line. Is stopped at the active line (probability “3/4”).
Furthermore, when the right reel 31 stops after the first left stop, “Replay B” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1).
Therefore, at the time of the first left stop, the small role 12 (probability “1/4”) or the specific symbol 01 (probability “3/4”) stops.

Furthermore, in a game in which the small role E6 table is used, the “bell” is stopped at the active line during the middle first stop.
Then, when the left reel 31 stops after the middle first stop, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the active line (PB = 1).
Further, when the right reel 31 is stopped after the middle first stop, “white BAR” is stopped on the active line and is stopped on the active line (probability “1/4”), and “white BAR” is stopped on the active line. When it is not possible, “Replay A” is stopped at the active line (probability “3/4”).
Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop, the small role 16 (probability “1/4”) or the specific symbol 02 (probability “3/4”) stops.

The small role F table is used when the condition device “48” is selected (when the small numbers 07, 08, 21, and 22 are simultaneously selected), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the small role 21 is stopped on the active line. Thus, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined. The small role F is to make the stop turn of “weak watermelon” appear.
Specifically, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “Black BAR (No. 18)”, “Replay A (limited to No. 13 except for No. 3 and No. 8),“ Replay B ”on the active line (lower left). (Except for No. 15, it is limited to No. 0) or “Cherry (No. 5 or No. 10)” is stopped (PB = 1). As a result, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” stops in the middle left.
Further, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the active line (middle middle) (PB ≠ 1). If “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” cannot be stopped in the middle or middle stage, “Replay A” is stopped at the active line.

Furthermore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” is stopped on the active line (upper right). When “Replay A” is stopped at the upper right, “Watermelon A” is stopped at the right middle.
Therefore, in a game in which the small role F table is used, when “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” can be stopped at the middle and middle level, the small role 21 wins, and the middle level line (invalid line) "Watermelon A / Watermelon B"-"Watermelon A / Watermelon B"-"Watermelon A" stops (Slight watermelon stoppage).
On the other hand, when “Replay A” stops in the middle and middle stages, the small role 07 or 08 stops on the active line, resulting in a stop appearance similar to the strong chance to be described later.

The small role G table is used when the condition device “49” is won (when the small bonuses 07, 08, 21, 22, and 23 are simultaneously selected), and within the range of the reel 31 stop control, The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to be stopped. The small role F is to make the stop appearance of “strong watermelon” appear.
Specifically, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the active line (lower left) (PB = 1).
Further, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the active line (middle middle) (PB ≠ 1). If “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” cannot be stopped in the middle or middle stage, “Replay A” is stopped at the active line.

Furthermore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “watermelon A” is stopped on the active line (upper right). (PB = 1).
Therefore, in the game using the small role G table, when “Watermelon A” or “Watermelon B” can be stopped in the middle and middle stages, the small role 22 wins and “Watermelon A / "Watermelon B"-"Watermelon A / Watermelon B"-"Watermelon A" stops (stopping strong watermelon).
On the other hand, when “Replay A” stops in the middle and middle stages, the small role 07 or 08 stops on the active line, resulting in a stop appearance similar to the strong chance to be described later.

The small role H table is used when the condition device “50” is won (when the small roles 07 and 08 are overlapped), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the small role 07 or 08 is stopped on the active line. Further, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined. As described above, the small role 07 or 08 is positioned as a strong chance item (a stop event in which the AT lottery is performed) in the present embodiment.
When the small role H table is used, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the effective line (lower left) when the left reel 31 is stopped (PB = 1), and the effective line is displayed when the middle reel 31 is stopped. “Replay A” is stopped at (middle middle) (PB = 1). Further, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” is stopped on the active line (upper right) (PB = 1).
As a result, the small role 07 or 08 wins with “PB = 1”.

The small role I table is used during an RB game during a 1BB game. In the RB game during the 1BB game, the small role I is won with the winning probability “1”. The small combination I is a winning combination of small combinations 01 to 24 (all small combinations). When the small combination I is used, the reels 31 are controlled to stop with priority on the number of sheets regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. Thereby, any of the small roles 01 to 03 always wins.
As described above, when the small role 01 is won, the “bell” is aligned with the lower line, when the small role 02 is awarded, the “bell” is aligned with the middle line, and when the small role 03 is won, the “bell” is aligned with the upper line. . Therefore, in order to avoid the monotony of the stop appearance, for example, based on the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small role 01 is won at the first left stop, the small role 02 is awarded at the middle first stop, and the right first For example, a small role 03 is awarded at the time of stoppage.

The 1BB table is used when a game is performed when the accessory condition device “1” is elected (1BB alone is elected), or when 1BB is won before the game and the game is not won, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop. Within the range, the combination of symbols at the time of stopping the reel 31 is determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped on the effective line and the symbol combination corresponding to the role other than 1BB is not stopped on the effective line. Is.
Since the symbol of 1BB is “black BAR” in all the reels 31 (PB ≠ 1), “black BAR” cannot be stopped at the effective line unless it is pushed.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the following stop control can be given when a small role or replay is won while the 1BB, which is a special role, is overtaken.
For example, first, priority is given to stopping the symbols of both the special roles and small roles or replays that have been won on the active line, and if both symbols cannot be stopped on the active line, the winning combination is selected. Stop control that gives priority to stopping a small role or replay symbol on the active line can be mentioned. The stop control that stops both the special role and the small role or replay on the active line is up to the second stop, and at the third stop, the special role, the small role or the replay is controlled to win. Multiple winning combinations will never be awarded.
Secondly, priority is given to stopping the symbols of both the special roles and small roles or replays that have been elected on the active line, and if both symbols cannot be stopped on the active line, they are selected. There is a stop control (opposite to the above) giving priority to stopping the symbol of the special role (1BB) on the active line.

Third, although priority is given to stopping the winning small role or replay symbol on the active line, when stopping the winning small role or replay symbol on the active line, When the symbol of the selected special combination (1BB) can be stopped on the active line at the same time, stop control for stopping at that position can be mentioned.
In addition, when a special role and a small role or replay of “PB = 1” are won simultaneously (when winning simultaneously), both the symbol of the selected special role and the symbol of the small role or replay are displayed. It is not necessary to perform control for stopping on the effective line, and it is also possible to perform control so that only the small role or replay symbol of “PB = 1” is stopped on the effective line.

Returning to FIG.
The winning determination means 63h determines whether the combination of symbols on the reel 31 stopped on the active line matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any combination when the reel 31 is stopped (whether any combination has won a prize). Or not). The winning determination means 63h determines the symbol on the active line by detecting, for example, the angle when the motor 32 is stopped, the number of steps, and the like.

  The payout means 63i determines that the combination of symbols stopped on the active line when the reel 31 is stopped matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations by the winning determination unit 63h, and the winning combination 63i Depending on the winning combination, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player, or credits are added. Also, when winning a replay, control is performed so that the number of medals inserted in the game is automatically inserted without paying out medals.

The RT control means 63j determines whether or not the RT transition condition is satisfied when each game and all the reels 31 are stopped. When it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, the RT control means 63j controls to perform the RT transition. Is.
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an RT transition diagram in the present embodiment. As described above, the RT of the present embodiment includes six types of non-RT and RT1 to RT5. As shown in FIG. 32, the types of condition devices to be selected and their winning probabilities differ for each RT.

As shown in FIG. 37, the RT of this embodiment includes the non-RT (RT0) and RT1 to RT5 as described above. In the following description, non-RT is also included in one RT.
In the present embodiment, the RT transition timing is set when the combination of symbols is stopped or when the RT transition combination is won, that is, when all stops (when all reels 31 are stopped). Therefore, in FIG. 37, for example, during RT1, when replay 05 wins when all reels 31 are stopped, RT shifts from RT1 to RT2 at the time of all stops. The transition to RT4 may be performed based on the winning of 1BB, or may be performed based on the fact that 1BB has not won a prize in the game won of 1BB.

Non-internal games are equivalent to non-RT and RT1 to RT3.
Further, the game in the inside corresponds to RT4.
Furthermore, during 1BB game, it corresponds to RT5.
During the execution of AT, which will be described later, the slot machine 10 is controlled so that it stays at RT3. However, when a player presses the stop switch 42 in the wrong order, it stays at RT1 or RT2. In some cases.

Further, even during non-AT, there is a case where the process shifts to RT2 or RT3.
First, the non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3 are all non-internal games, and in these non-internal games, the lottery of the accessory condition device number “1” (1BB) is performed. When 1BB is won in these RTs, the RT control means 63j determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to RT4 corresponding to the internal game.
It is also possible to transition to RT at the moment of winning 1BB and define the game won for 1BB as an internal game. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the RT transition condition is when all stops, the game is a non-internal middle game from the time of winning 1BB (moment) to the time when all the games are stopped. At the time of all stops in the winning game (when 1BB has not won a prize), the game shifts to an internal game. In addition, when 1BB wins in a game won by 1BB, the game shifts to RT5 when all the games are stopped. In this case, the game does not go through RT4 (internal game).

RT4 is continued until the winning 1BB wins. When the RT control means 63j determines that 1BB has won in RT4, it determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and proceeds to RT5.
RT5 is a 1BB game. When the RT5 is shifted to RT5, it is continued until the end condition of RT5 (end condition of 1BB game) is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the end condition of 1BB game is set to pay out more than 450 medals. In RT5, the condition device number “51” is won every game, and every game is paid out, so that the number of payouts exceeds 450 in the 51st game of RT5.
The RT control means 63j determines whether or not more than 450 medals have been paid out in each game and RT5, and if it is determined that more than 450 medals have been paid out, the RT transition condition is satisfied (1BB game). And the control is performed so that the next game is shifted to non-RT.

  In non-RT, the RT control means 63j continues non-RT until a specific symbol is displayed. In non-RT, each condition device of the small roles E1 to E6 is drawn, and if any of these condition devices is won and the selected small role is missed in the game, a specific symbol is displayed. When the specific symbol is displayed, the RT control means 63j determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to RT1 from the next game.

  RT1 continues until replay 05 is stopped and displayed. In RT1, the replays B1 to B5 are selected by lottery, and if any of these condition devices is selected and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order in which the replay 05 wins, the replay 05 is stopped and displayed. When the replay 05 is stopped and displayed in RT1, the RT control means 63j determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to RT2 from the next game.

RT2 continues until replay 06 is stopped and displayed, until replay 03 or 04 is stopped or displayed, or a specific symbol is displayed. In RT2, the replays C1 to C5 are selected by lottery, and if any of these condition devices is selected and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order in which the replay 06 wins, the replay 06 is stopped and displayed. When the replay 06 is stopped and displayed at RT2, the RT control means 63j determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to RT3 from the next game.
On the other hand, in RT2, if one of the replays C1 to C5 is selected and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order in which the replay 03 or 04 wins, the replay 03 or 04 is stopped and displayed. When the replay 03 or 04 is stopped and displayed in RT2, the RT control means 63j determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied and shifts to RT1 from the next game.

  Furthermore, in RT2, the condition devices of the small roles E1 to E6 are drawn in lots, and if one of these condition devices is won and the selected small role is missed, a specific symbol is displayed. When a specific symbol is displayed at RT2, the RT control means 63j determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to RT1 from the next game.

  RT3 continues until the replay 03 or 04 is stopped or displayed or a specific symbol is displayed. In RT3, the replays D1 to D3 are selected by lottery, one of these condition devices is won, and the replay 03 or 04 is stopped when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order in which the replay 03 or 04 wins. indicate. When the replay 03 or 04 is stopped and displayed in RT3, the RT control means 63j determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to RT1 from the next game.

  On the other hand, when one of the replays D1 to D3 is selected in RT3 and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order in which the replay 01 or 02 wins, the replay 01 or 02 is stopped and displayed. The RT control means 63j maintains RT3 when the replay 01 or 02 is stopped and displayed in RT3.

  Furthermore, in RT3, the condition devices of the small roles E1 to E6 are drawn in lots, and if one of these condition devices is won and the selected small role is missed, a specific symbol is displayed. When a specific symbol is displayed at RT3, the RT control means 63j determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to RT1 from the next game.

Further, in the above RT transition, the stay probability of RT1 is highest during non-internal and non-AT. However, if the stop device 42 is operated in the correct push order (1/6) when a condition device that is selected for replays is selected, there may be a transition to RT2 or RT3. However, in RT2 and RT3, if the stop device 42 is operated in the incorrect answer pressing order (5/6) when the condition device for which replay is selected and won, the process returns to RT1. Moreover, even if a specific symbol is displayed at the time of winning the small roles E1 to E6, the process returns to RT1. Thus, during non-AT, it is set to return to RT1 as much as possible.
The relationship between RT and the main gaming state (non-AT / AT) will be described later.

The main game state control means 63k determines whether or not the transition condition for each game and main game state is satisfied, and controls the transition of the main game state when it is determined that the transition condition for the main game state is satisfied. is there. Although the main gaming state and the RT are related, they shift independently.
FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the main game state.
Here, the “main game state” is, in this embodiment,
Main gaming state 0: Normal Main gaming state 1: AT precursor Main gaming state 2: AT preparation Main gaming state 3: AT
Main game state 4: Inside the 1BB Main game state 5: During the 1BB game Main game state 6: AT preparation or AT, and 1BB inside Main game state 7: AT preparation or AT, and 1BB game Prepare.

Among the eight types of main game states described above, the non-internal state is the main game state 0-3.
Also, the inside is the main game state 4 and 6.
Furthermore, during the 1BB game, the main game states are 5 and 7.
In the main game states 6 and 7, “AT preparation or AT is in progress” is displayed, but AT preparation or AT and 1BB inside or 1BB game do not proceed at the same time. This corresponds to a case where 1BB is won during preparation or AT, and in this case, AT preparation or AT is temporarily suspended to be in 1BB or in 1BB game.
The main game state 0 (normal time) is a game that is not won in AT (AT stock number = “0”) and is not won in 1BB.
If the AT is won in the main gaming state 0, the main gaming state control means 63k determines the number of AT precursor games by lottery. The number of precursor games is determined using a random number within a range of “0” to “32”. The number of precursor games may not be determined by the main game state control means 63k but may be determined when the above-described AT lottery means 63d is won by the AT lottery.

  If the AT is won in the main game state 0 (normal time), the next game shifts to the main game state 1 (AT precursor). Then, the player stays in the main game state 1 for the number of games (number of precursor games) determined at the time of winning the AT. For this reason, the main game state control means 63k counts each game and the number of games when it shifts to the AT precursor. Then, when “the number of precursor games =“ 0 ””, the next game shifts to the main game state 2 (AT preparation).

On the other hand, in the main game state 0, the main game state control means 63k controls to shift from the next game to the main game state 4 (inside 1BB) when 1BB is won without winning the AT. In the present embodiment, in the main gaming state 4, AT lottery is not performed.
Here, as described above, the inside of 1BB is RT4. Therefore, “main game state 4 = RT4”. In addition, in 1BB inside, the correct answer pushing order is not notified at the time of pushing order bell winning.

In addition, when 1BB and strong cherries are won simultaneously, AT lottery is performed based on the strong cherries and there are cases where the AT is won. In this case, based on the winning of 1BB, it becomes 1BB inside (main game state 4). After this winning, even if a strong cherry is won in 1BB, no AT lottery is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from intentionally extending the inside of 1BB and trying to receive an AT lottery.
Even if a strong cherry is won during the 1BB inside, the stop control of the reel 31 inside the 1BB is made different, so that it becomes a stop appearance at the time of weak cherry winning (even by pressing when the left reel 31 stops) For example, control is performed so that “cherry” is not stopped in the middle stage but “cherry” is stopped in the lower stage. As a result, it is possible to show the player as if the weak cherry was won without winning the strong cherry. Normally, AT lottery is performed at the time of strong cherry winning, so strong cherry winning is beneficial to the player, but if AT lottery is not performed inside 1BB, if strong cherry wins (wins) inside 1BB This is to give the player the impression of loss.
In addition, when the strong cherry is won during the 1BB inside, not only the reel 31 stop control but also the effects (back lamp effect, effect sound, etc.) different from when the strong cherry is won during the 1BB non-inside For example, it is preferable to show the player that the performance is a weak cherry winning (strong cherry non-winning) by changing to an effect at the time of weak cherry winning.

The main game state 4 is continued until 1BB wins. The main game state control means 63k controls to shift to the main game state 5 (1BB game) when 1BB wins in the main game state 4. As with the above-described RT transition, the main gaming state control means 63k determines that the transition condition of the main gaming state is satisfied when 1BB is won in the main gaming state 0 and 1BB is won in the game. Control is performed so as to shift from the next game to the main game state 5 (without going through the main game state 4).
. The main game state 5 corresponds to 1BB game and corresponds to RT5 described above. Therefore, “main game state 5 = RT5”.

  Since the main game state 5 is a 1BB game, as described above, the main game state 5 is continued until more than 450 payouts are made. The main game state control means 63k determines that the transition condition of the main game state (the end condition of the main game state 5) is satisfied when there are more than 450 payouts in the main game state 5, and the main game state 5 Control to shift to the gaming state 0 or 2.

In the present embodiment, in the main game state 5, when the AT lottery is executed and the AT lottery in the main game state 5 is won, when the main game state 5 is finished, the state shifts to the main game state 2 (AT preparation). To control.
On the other hand, when the AT lottery in the main game state 5 is not won, when the main game state 5 is finished, the state shifts to the main game state 0.

The main game state 2 continues until the AT start condition is satisfied or until 1BB is won. In the present embodiment, the main game state control means 63k shifts from the next game to the main game state 3 (AT) when the AT start condition is satisfied in the main game state 2. On the other hand, in the main game state 2, the main game state control means 63k wins 1BB before the AT start condition is satisfied, and when 1BB is not won in the game, the main game state control unit 63k shifts to the main game state 6 from the next game. Control to do. The main gaming state 6 is continued until 1BB wins. The main game state control means 63k controls to shift from the next game to the main game state 7 when 1BB wins in the main game state 6.
When 1BB is won in the main game state 2 and 1BB is won in the game, the main game state control means 63k changes from the next game to the main game state 7 (without going through the main game state 6). Control to transition.

The main game state 7 continues until RT5, that is, 1BB game ends. When the main game state control means 63k determines that the end condition of the main game state 7 (1BB game) is satisfied in the main game state 7, the main game state control means 63k controls to shift from the next game to the main game state 2 (AT preparation). To do. Thus, the main game states 6 and 7 are states in which the 1BB game is digested while having the right to execute the AT after the 1BB game ends.
In the main game states 0 to 7 described above, only the main game state 3 is strictly referred to as AT in the present embodiment. When 1BB is won during AT and the game state is changed to the main game state 6, the AT is temporarily interrupted, but the inside of 1BB is in progress. Furthermore, when the 1BB wins, it is in the 1BB game.

In principle, it is in the main game state 3 that the correct answer pressing order is notified when the pressing order bell is won. In the main game state 2, whether or not to notify the correct answer pressing order when the pressing order bell is won is arbitrary. Here, when notifying the correct answer pressing order at the time of winning the pressing order bell in the main gaming state 2, it is necessary to prevent the strategy of staying in the main gaming state 2 without intentionally shifting to the main gaming state 3. On the other hand, if the correct push order is not notified when the push order is won in the main game state 2, it is considered that there is no concern of not intentionally shifting to the main game state 3.
In the main game state 2, since it is necessary to shift to the main game state 3, the RT promotion push order (push order for making the transition to RT3) is notified at the time of replay overlap winning.
When the main game state 5 or 7 (1BB game) is terminated and the state shifts to the main game state 2 (AT preparation), RT is non-RT. And in non-RT, unless specific symbol is displayed, it does not transfer to RT1. For this reason, even during AT preparation, during non-RT, when the condition device numbers “42” to “47” are selected, the push order for winning the three bells is not notified (a specific symbol can be displayed as much as possible). Increase the nature).

Further, in the main game state 4 corresponding to the inside of 1BB, the correct answer push order is not notified when the push order bell is won. This is to prevent a strategy of deliberately staying inside the 1BB without winning the winning 1BB.
On the other hand, when winning 1BB in the main gaming state 2 or 3 and shifting to the main gaming state 6 (inside 1BB), notification of the correct pushing order at the time of pushing order bell winning may be continued. For example, if the notification of the correct push order is suddenly interrupted during AT, the player will be immediately informed that 1BB has been won. On the other hand, if the notification of the correct answer pressing order at the time of winning the pressing order bell is continued inside the 1BB, the winning 1BB can be kept inside the 1BB without winning. As a countermeasure for this, in 1BB, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct push order when the push order is won, the ball payout rate is set to be less than “1”. Alternatively, the present invention is not limited to the above, and notification of the correct pressing order at the time of winning the pressing order bell may be interrupted at the time of transition to the inside of 1BB or after a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) after winning 1BB.
Furthermore, in the main game states 5 and 7 corresponding to the 1BB game, since the lottery such as the push order bell is not performed in the first place, the correct push order is not notified.

As described above, when the AT start condition is satisfied in the main game state 2, the next game shifts to the main game state 3 (AT).
Here, RT in the main gaming state 2 is any of non-RT, RT1, RT2, or RT3. Since the main game state 7 is a 1BB game, the game is non-RT when the 1BB game is terminated and the next game is shifted to the main game state 2.
Regardless of the RT of the main game state 2, control is performed so that the main game state 3 (AT) is executed at RT3 as much as possible.
For example, when the main game state 2 is non-RT, it waits until the specific symbol is displayed or notifies the pressing order in which the specific symbol can be displayed in the game in which the specific symbol can be displayed. This shifts from non-RT to RT1.

In RT1, the player waits until the replays B1 to B5 are won. When the replays B1 to B5 are won, the replay 05 is won (the transition to RT2) is notified of the push order. Further, RT2 waits until replays C1 to C5 are won, and when replays C1 to C5 are won, it notifies the replay 06 of winning (transition to RT3) is notified. Then, when shifting to RT3, AT, that is, main game state 3 is started.
The reason for this control is that the AT is executed with a high replay probability (RT). In the present embodiment, RT3 has a high replay probability for non-RT, RT1, and RT2.

However, if the player pushes the stop switch 42 in the wrong order, or if the player does not follow the notice even if the push order of the stop switch 42 for shifting to RT3 is reported, It is conceivable that the process does not shift to RT3, for example, when the above occurs.
If the transition to RT3 is set to the main game state 3, that is, the AT start condition, the push order bell at RT2 is set to notify the correct push order when the push order bell is elected in the main game state 2 (at AT preparation). If the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct push order notified when winning, but not intentionally obeying the correct press order notified when replay overlaps, RT1 and RT2 are moved back and forth. Do not migrate. As a result, it is possible to intentionally not go to RT3 indefinitely.
As a countermeasure in such a case, execution of the following control may be mentioned.

  First, at the time of winning Replay C in RT2, even when the notified correct pressing order is not followed, the game state is shifted to the main gaming state 3 and AT is started. In this case, if the stop switch 42 is not operated in the correct pressing order when the replay C is won in RT2, it falls to RT1. Therefore, the player starts the AT from RT1, and the replay winning probability is the normal probability for the AT until the transition to RT3. In this case, when the replay B is won at RT1, the correct push order for moving to RT2 is notified, and when the replay C is won at RT2, the correct push order for moving to RT3 is notified. .

Conventionally, when a pressing order different from the notified correct answer pressing order is performed, as a penalty, control is performed not to notify the correct answer pressing order when the pressing order bell is won for a certain period of time. However, even if the player operates the stop switch 42 in any pushing order, such a control is not possible if the specification is such that no penalty is given.
Therefore, in the game in which the correct answer push order for shifting to RT3 is notified in RT2, even if the stop switch 42 is not operated in the correct answer push order, it is uniformly the main game state regardless of which RT stays. Is transferred to the main game state 3 and AT is started. Even when AT is started from RT1, the correct pressing order is notified when the pressing order is won.

However, in RT2, in the game in which the correct answer pressing order for transitioning to RT3 is notified and the stop switch 42 cannot be operated in the correct answer pressing order due to a player's operation error, AT is started from RT1. The Rukoto.
For this reason, depending on the situation, the following methods may be adopted.

.
First, in the game in which the correct answer push order is notified in RT2 (both in the push order bell win and replay B win), if the stop switch 42 is not operated in the correct push order, the main game is always performed. Transition to state 3 can be mentioned. In this case, in RT2, for example, the correct answer push order was notified at the time of the push order bell winning, but when the player did not operate the stop switch 42 in the correct answer push order, the player entered the main game state 3. Become.
In this first method, a player's operation mistake cannot be remedied, but there is no need to distinguish whether the condition device won in the game is a push order bell or a transition replay, and a notification is made at RT2. Since it is only necessary to determine whether the pressing order is different from the correct answer pressing order, the processing load on the main control board 60 can be reduced (capacity reduction).

Secondly, in the main game state 2, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a push order different from the notified push order at the time of transition replay winning, the transition from the next game to the main game state 3 may be mentioned. On the other hand, in the main game state 2, the correct answer push order is notified when the push order bell is won, and even when the stop switch 42 is operated in a push order different from the notified push order, Leave.
In this way, even if the stop switch 42 is intentionally operated in the incorrect answer pressing order at the time of the transition replay winning, the main game state 2 will not be continued. For example, in the main game state 2 and RT2, as described above, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of incorrect pressing when the transition replay (replay C) is won, the main game state becomes the main game state 3, and RT is RT1. Then, after the transition to the main game state 3, in RT and RT2, the correct answer pressing order for shifting to RT3 is sequentially notified.

  It is considered that the player rarely operates the stop switch 42 in the push order different from the intentionally notified push order when the correct answer push order is notified when the push order bell is won (the player's medal acquisition). Because the number of sheets decreases). Accordingly, when the push order is incorrect when the push order bell is won, it is considered that the player has made a mistake in the push order. However, unlike the first method, it is necessary to determine whether the condition device won in the game is a transition replay or a push order bell, so that the control burden is increased accordingly.

  Third, although it differs from the present embodiment, for example, when a transition replay is won, the RT is dropped when the push order for promoting the RT, the push order for dropping the RT, and the push order for maintaining the RT are provided. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, the main game state 3 may be entered. With this setting, it is possible to increase the probability that a player who has made a mistake in pushing order can be rescued. However, if the setting is made in this way, it is necessary to determine that RT has fallen in addition to winning the transition replay, in addition to an incorrect answer in the pressing order, and the processing load increases.

  In the main gaming state 2, the main gaming state control means 63k notifies the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won. Further, in the game in which the specific symbol can be stopped and displayed in the main gaming state 2 and non-RT, the pressing order in which the specific symbol can be stopped and displayed is notified. Further, in the main game state 2 and RT1, when the replay B is won, a push order for making a transition to RT2 (a push order for winning the replay 05) is notified. Furthermore, in the main game state 2 and RT2, when the replay C is won, a push order for making a transition to RT3 (a push order for winning the replay 06) is notified. In the main gaming state 2, the correct push order may not be notified when the push order is won, and only the correct push order (push order for shifting RT) when the transfer replay is won may be notified. In this way, it is possible to create a gaming state in which medals do not increase during AT preparation.

In the main game state 3, the main game state control means 63k notifies the correct push order when the push order bell is won, and when the replay D is won (when the main game state 3 is RT3), the replay 01 or 02 Is notified of the push order (the push order for maintaining RT3). Therefore, when the AT in the main gaming state 3 is executed while staying at RT3, the RT will not fall if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct push order at the time of replay push order notification.
Furthermore, when the main game state 3 is RT3, when the replay D is won, the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order different from the notified pressing order, and if it falls to RT1, the subsequent RT1 and RT2 When the transition replay is won, the push order for promoting the RT is notified.

  When the AT (one set) is completed in the main game state 3, the main game state control means 63k shifts from the next game to the main game state 0 or 1. In this embodiment, the number of AT stocks for how many remaining ATs are repeated is determined. When “AT stock number> 0” at the end of the main game state 3 (AT), the main game state 3 starts from the main game state 3. Transition to gaming state 1 (AT precursor). Further, at the end of the main gaming state 3, if “AT stock number = 0”, the state shifts from the main gaming state 3 to the main gaming state 0 (normal time). There are various methods for setting the AT stock number to “−1”. For example, it may be when the main game state 3 is entered or when the main game state 3 is finished.

  Further, at the end of the main game state 3 (AT), if “AT stock number> 0”, the number of precursor games is determined when the main game state 3 is shifted to the main game state 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of AT stocks is determined (or added), the number of precursor games of each AT can be determined in advance and stored.

When the AT ends in the main gaming state 3 and shifts to the main gaming state 0 (normal time), RT at the end of the AT is RT3. And in RT3, if Replay D is drawn out and Replay 03 or 04 wins at the time of Replay D winning, it shifts to RT1 from the next game.
On the other hand, when the AT ends in the main gaming state 3 and shifts to the main gaming state 1 (AT precursor), RT at the end of the AT is RT3. And in RT3, if Replay D is drawn out and Replay 03 or 04 wins at the time of Replay D winning, it shifts to RT1 from the next game. In RT1, until the number of precursor games reaches “0”, the correct pressing order for winning Replay 05 is not notified when Replay B is won.

  When the number of AT precursor games is digested in the main game state 1, the next game shifts to the main game state 2 (AT is being prepared). Then, in the main game state 2 (and RT1), when the replay B is won, the correct answer pressing order for winning the replay 05 is notified. When Replay 05 wins, the process proceeds to RT2. Further, RT2 notifies the correct pressing order for winning Replay 06 when Replay C is won. When Replay 06 wins, it shifts to RT3, shifts to main game state 3, and starts AT again.

When the main game state 1, that is, when 1BB is won during the AT sign, the game proceeds to the main game state 6 in the 1BB. The main game state 6 at this time is RT4. Further, when 1BB wins in the main game state 6, the state shifts to the main game state 7. The main game state 7 is RT5 (1BB game). When the main game state 7, that is, 1BB game is ended, the state shifts to the main game state 2, that is, during AT preparation.
Therefore, when 1BB is won when the number of precursor games is not exhausted during AT precursor, the number of precursor games is cleared (set to “0”) at that time. That is, when the 1BB game is finished through the inside of the 1BB, it does not return to the AT precursor (main game state 1) but shifts to the AT preparation (main game state 2).

  Also, when 1BB is won in the main game state 2 (at AT preparation) or the main game state 3 (in the AT), the game moves to the main game state 6 in the 1BB as described above. The main game state 6 at this time is RT4. Further, when 1BB wins in the main game state 6, the state shifts to the main game state 7. The main game state 7 is RT5 (1BB game). When the main game state 7, that is, 1BB game is ended, the state shifts to the main game state 2, that is, during AT preparation.

Here, when 1BB is won in the main game state 3 (during AT), the game in the main game state 3 is temporarily interrupted, so the counting of the number of AT games is stopped. Then, after the end of the 1BB game, when returning to the main game state 3 (AT) through the main game state 2 (AT preparation), the counting of the number of interrupted AT games is resumed. Instead of doing this, when 1BB is won during the main game state 3 (AT) and the game shifts to the 1BB game, the initial number of games of the AT is then set when the main game state 3 (AT) returns. It may be set again (the AT game frequency may be reset).
In addition, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to increase the number of AT games when 1BB is won or during 1BB game. When the lottery is won, the added value is added to the count value of the number of AT games.

When 1BB is won from the main game state 1 (AT precursor), the main game state 2 (AT preparation), and the main game state 3 (AT), 1BB game is executed through the inside of 1BB, and 1BB game is ended. As shown in FIG. 37, RT is always non-RT. Therefore, when the 1BB game is ended in the main game state 7, the main game state 2 (AT preparation) and non-RT are set. For this reason, a specific symbol is displayed in non-RT, and the game proceeds to RT1, main game state 2 (AT preparation) until replay 05 wins and moves to RT2 in RT1, and replay 06 wins and moves to RT3 in RT2. ) Each of RT1 and RT2 reports a push order (correct push order) for promoting RT when a condition device capable of promoting RT is elected.
In addition, when the condition device numbers “42” to “47” are won during non-RT, the pressing order for displaying a specific symbol (the pressing order for dropping three bells) may be notified, or It is not necessary to notify the pressing order. On the other hand, when the condition device numbers “23” to “40” are won in the non-RT, the correct pressing order may be notified or may not be notified.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during the game and during the game standby.
The main control board 60 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 60 transmits information (control commands, etc.) necessary for production in one direction to the sub control board 80 by parallel communication. To do.
The main control board 60 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected but may be connected using an optical communication unit. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, and serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Similarly to the main control board 60, the sub control board 80 includes an RWM 81, a ROM (sub ROM) 82, a sub CPU 83, and the like.
Here, an MPU including an RWM 81, a ROM 82, and a sub CPU 83 is mounted on the sub control board 80. Further, separately from the MPU built-in RWM, the RWM is mounted outside the MPU (on the sub-control board 80). For this reason, the term RWM 81 is used to include an RWM with a built-in MPU and an external RWM.
The RWM (sub memory) 81 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data and the like captured when the sub CPU 83 controls the effect.
A ROM (sub-ROM) 82 is a storage medium for storing programs such as a lottery for production, various data, etc. as production data.

1 is connected to the sub-control board 80 via an input port or an output port (not shown in FIG. 1). However, the peripheral device for production is not limited to these.
The effect lamp 21 is made of an LED, for example, and lights up in a predetermined pattern when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Note that the effect lamp 21 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31, and a back lamp and reel 31 for illuminating from behind the symbols displayed on the reels 31 (three symbols that are continuously visible from the display window 13). Fluorescent lamps that illuminate the symbols on the reel 31 from above, and a frame lamp that is disposed in front of the front cover of the slot machine 10 and blinks when winning a winning combination.

The speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, and the like, and supports various effect images during the game (push order during 1BB game and AT, lottery results of condition devices) Etc.), game information (1BB game, number of games during AT, number of acquired games, etc.), and the like are displayed.
The cross key 24 and the push button 25 are used when displaying information intended by the player or when a hall manager (store manager or the like) changes various settings.

The sub CPU 83 includes effect output control means 83a.
As will be described later, the effect output control means 83a is a control command transmitted from the main control board 60, specifically, the operation state, the number of 1BB acquired, the main game state, the number of precursor games / the number of AT games, the RT state. Based on the control commands of push order instruction number, effect group number, and accessory condition device number, at what timing (when the start switch 41 or each stop switch 42 is operated, etc.) (How the lamp 21 is turned on, blinked or turned off, what kind of sound is output from the speaker 22, what kind of image is displayed on the image display device 23, etc.) Specific production contents are determined by lottery.

Then, the effect output control means 83a controls the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 in accordance with the determination. Further, during 1BB game or AT, the push order of the stop switch 42, the number of acquired games, the number of remaining games, etc. are displayed as images.
In addition, since information of “0” is transmitted as the push order instruction number during non-AT, the sub-control board 80 does not notify the correct push order during non-AT. However, it is possible to notify the pressing order of “left middle right” as a mere effect at the time of replay A winning of a condition device irrelevant to the pressing order, for example, winning and replay condition device number “1”.

  Furthermore, it can be said that the control command for the production group number does not include information on which condition device number is actually won, but includes rough winning information. For example, when the control command corresponding to the production group number “13” is received, it is impossible for the sub-control board 80 to know which push order bell is won. However, you can know which of the push order bells was won. Therefore, it is possible to output effects such as displaying the symbol of “bell” or lighting the frame lamp with “yellow” which is the corresponding color of “bell”.

  Further, when the sub control board 80 receives the push order instruction number transmitted from the main control board 60 during AT (including AT preparation), the sub control board 80 notifies the correct push order corresponding to the received push order instruction number. . For example, when the condition device number “24” is won in a game in AT and a control command corresponding to the push order instruction number “2” is received, “right / left middle” or “132” which is the correct push order. As described above, the contents that the player can easily know the correct pressing order are notified.

Next, information processing by the main control board 60 (main CPU 63) will be described based on a flowchart.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing processing (M_PRG_START) when starting a program by the main control board 60.
In FIG. 39, when the program is started in step S11, the main control board 60 initializes the register in the next step S12. Specific processing includes, for example, processing for storing the upper address of RWM 61 (F0H in this embodiment) in the Q register. By this processing, for example, when specifying the address of RWM 61, by specifying only the lower address (for example, “B7” when address “F0B7” is specified), the data is combined with the data (F0H) specified by the Q register. Thus, it becomes possible to specify the address “F0B7” of the RWM 61, which leads to a reduction in the program capacity.

  Next, proceeding to step S13, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the power-off process completion flag is a normal value. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned off, a power-off processing completion flag (stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 61. In the present embodiment, illustration is omitted) is stored in step S652 (FIG. 66) described later. This power-off processing completion flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was normally performed when the power was turned on. In step S13, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value (in this embodiment, “01” H), the process proceeds to step S14, and is not a normal value (in this embodiment, “01”). If it is determined that other than H), the process proceeds to step S16 without calculating the checksum data in steps S14 and S15.

In step S14, a checksum of the RWM 61 is calculated. Specifically, the checksum calculation (target for the work area used in the program, the unused area, the stack area) is the same as the checksum of the RWM 61 (step S653 in FIG. 66 to be described later) executed during the power-off process (target) (Addition of the data value of the address) is executed.
In this embodiment, the checksum data of the RWM 61 is set so that the checksum of a predetermined range of the RWM 61 is performed and the data becomes “0” by the checksum.

In step S15, it is determined whether or not the range of the RWM 61 for calculating the checksum has been completed. Specifically, the next address is designated from the address of the RWM 61 that calculated the current checksum, and it is determined whether or not the next address is an address for calculating the checksum. When it is determined that the checksum calculation has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S14. On the other hand, when it is determined that the range of the RWM 61 for calculating the checksum has been completed, the process proceeds to step S16.
In the subsequent processing, when data stored in a plurality of ranges (addresses) of the RWM 61 is initialized, the same processing is executed in the range of the specified RWM 61 in this embodiment.

  In step S16, the main control board 60 stores the power-off recovery data in a predetermined register (for example, B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and the checksum data of the RWM 61 is a normal value, the normal value is stored as the power-off recovery data. On the other hand, when the power-off processing completed flag is an abnormal value (“No” in step S13), and / or the checksum data of the RWM 61 is an abnormal value (the entire range check calculated in step S14). When it is determined that the sum data value is not “0”), an abnormal value is stored as the power-off recovery data.

  In the next step S17, the level data of the input port 1 (FIG. 8) is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register). Next, the process proceeds to step S18, where it is determined whether or not the designated switch is on based on the level data of the input port 1. In this embodiment, the “designated switch” is a signal (D1) of the door switch 16, a signal (D2) of the setting door switch 54, and a signal (D3) of the setting key switch 52 of the input port 1. One.

The signal of the door switch 16 is on (the front cover (housing) is opened), the signal of the setting door switch 54 is on (the setting door is opened), and the setting key The setting change is permitted only when the signal of the switch 52 is ON (when the setting key is inserted). When all three designated switches are on, it is possible to shift to the setting change process of step S22. However, when at least one designated switch is not on, it is not permitted to shift to the setting change process of step S22. .
That is, the setting key switch 52 regardless of whether the signal of the door switch 16 is off (the front cover is closed) or the signal of the setting door switch 54 is off (the setting door is closed). This signal cannot be turned on, and since there is a high possibility of fraud, the transition to the setting change process is not permitted.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S18 that all the designated switches are on, the process proceeds to step S19, and when it is determined that the switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S21.
In step S19, the main control board 60 determines whether the power-off recovery data is an abnormal value. This power-off recovery data is the data stored in the register in step S16.

When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is an abnormal value, the process proceeds to the setting change process of step S22 while holding that the power-off recovery data is an abnormal value (the data stored in step S16). If it is determined that it is not, the process proceeds to step S20. In step S20, it is determined whether or not a setting change disable flag is on. Here, the setting change impossibility flag is a D6 bit value of the above-described medal management flag, and is disabled during a lottery process (step S50) to a game end check process (step S73) of the condition device described later. Flag. If the setting change disable flag is on, the process proceeds to step S21. If the setting change disable flag is not on, the setting change process in step S22 is performed while holding that the power-off recovery data is a normal value (the data stored in step S16). move on. As described above, the present embodiment includes the setting change process when the power-off recovery data is an abnormal value and the setting change process when the power-off recovery data is a normal value.
In the present embodiment, the setting change impossibility flag is provided. However, when the setting change is always possible, the setting change impossibility flag may not be provided. In that case, the process corresponding to step S20 becomes unnecessary.

  In step S21, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the power-off recovery data is a normal value. This process is equivalent to step S19, and refers to the data stored in the register in step S16. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S23 to perform a power recovery process (M_POWER_ON; FIG. 40). On the other hand, when it is determined that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S24, and an unrecoverable error process is performed. In this embodiment, an error when it is determined in step S21 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value is referred to as an “E1” error, and “E1” is displayed in a predetermined digit. The unrecoverable error is an error that cannot be canceled unless the setting change process is executed.

As described above, in the program start process (M_PRG_START), the process proceeds to the setting change process when the setting change is possible in both cases where the power-off recovery data is a normal value and an abnormal value.
Further, when the designated switch is not on (“No” in step S18) or when the setting cannot be changed and the power-off recovery data is an abnormal value (“No” in step S21), the unrecoverable error processing is performed. When the power-off recovery data is a normal value (“Yes” in step S21), the process proceeds to the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON).
First, in step S831, the stack pointer is restored. Here, the stack pointer is one of the registers, and when power interruption occurs, data at the time of power interruption (for example, register value, instruction processing (return address) of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) The address of the RWM 61 to be stored next in the RWM 61 area (also referred to as a stack area). That is, the return of the stack pointer refers to a process in which the stack pointer stored when the power is turned off is once stored in the RWM 61, and the data stored in the RWM 61 is stored again in the stack pointer.
In the next step S832, the set value data stored in a predetermined address (not shown in the present embodiment) of the RWM 61 is read, and whether the set value range is the normal range (“1” to “6”). It is determined whether it is within the range. If it is determined that the set value is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S833. If it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S839, and the process proceeds to an unrecoverable error process. In this embodiment, the error in this case is referred to as an “E6” error, and “E6” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72.

In step S833, the initialization range of the unused area of the RWM 61 is set in the register. In the next step S834, initialization of the RWM 61 in the range set in step S833 is executed. Here, it is conceivable that a value is stored in the RWM 61 due to noise or the like even in an unused area. If a value is stored in an unused area, there is a possibility that it may lead to fraud etc. Therefore, the unused area should be initialized when the power is turned on (usually once a day). Yes.
In the next step S835, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 61 is completed. If it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S836. In step S836, the input ports 0 to 2 are read. This process is a process for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port before power-off to the latest data.
In step S837, an interrupt is activated. This process is, for example, a process for setting a timer interruption period, and the interruption process is executed every predetermined period (in this embodiment, 2.235 ms) after the process.
In step S838, the above-described power-off processing flag is cleared, that is, set to “0”. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

In the power recovery process described above, after the input ports 0 to 2 are read (step S836), the interrupt process is started (step S837). The reason is as follows.
In the present embodiment, it is configured such that a set key can be inserted and a set value can be confirmed during game standby. Here, when the falling signal of the setting key switch 52 becomes “1”, it is determined that the confirmation of the setting value is completed.
However, for example, it is assumed that the power is cut off during setting confirmation, and the power is turned on by turning off the setting key switch 52 (with the setting key removed) during the power cut.

In this case, the falling signal of the setting key switch 52 is set to “1” based on the fact that the setting key switch 52 is turned off by the interrupt processing after the power is restored, so that the falling of the setting key switch is detected. The
As a result, the state at the time of power-off recovery is different from the state before the power-off. Specifically, the falling signal of the setting key switch 52 is “0” in the state before the power is turned off, whereas the falling signal of the setting key switch 52 is “1” when the power is restored.
Therefore, in order to avoid the situation before and after the power is turned off, the values of the RWMs 61 of the input ports 0 to 2 are updated to the latest state when the power is restored. Therefore, after executing the input port 0-2 read processing, the interrupt processing is activated.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) processing in the present embodiment. Then, during this main process, an interrupt process (I_INTR; FIG. 64) is performed every 2.235 ms.
In FIG. 41, in step S41, a stack pointer is set. In this case, the stack pointer is set by executing the same process as that in step S831 described above.
In the next step S42, game start set processing (MS_GAME_SET) is performed. When the process proceeds to step S42, the process proceeds to the process of FIG.

In the next step S43, a bet medal is read. This process is a process of reading how many medals are bet at the present time.
In the next step S44, the presence / absence of a bet medal is determined based on the bet number read in step S43.
If it is determined in step S44 that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S46. If it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S45 to perform a medal insertion waiting process, and the process proceeds to step S46.

  In step S46, a management process for inserted medals is performed. Although the details of this process are omitted, the outline thereof is that the rise of the signals of the insertion sensors 44 and 44b and the bet switch 40 and the rise of the signal of the settlement switch 46 are detected, and the insertion of the medal is performed by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. When it is detected, the process proceeds to a medal care check process, and when it is determined that the medal care is normal, the process proceeds to a bet process or a storage addition process. Further, when the rising of the signal of the bet switch 40 is detected, the process proceeds to the storage bet process, and when the rising of the signal of the settlement switch 46 is detected, the process proceeds to the settlement process.

  In the next step S47, a soft random number update process is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding “1” by one) a processing random number for processing (arithmetic processing) into a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used in the condition device lottery means 63b. The soft random number is a 16-bit random number having a range of 0 to 65535. As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) incremented at the time of an interrupt) to a value before update may be executed.

  In the next step S48, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S49, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S43. Even when the start switch 41 is operated, if the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number of the game, “No” is determined in step S48. When the specified number is reached, the start switch acceptance permission flag (the “D0” bit of the medal management flag) is turned on.

In step S49, a process at the time of receiving the start switch is executed. This process includes reading a built-in random number, turning off the blocker 45, starting the rotation of the reel 31, determining whether the set value is normal, and the like.
In step S50, the condition device lottery means 63b executes the condition device lottery at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. In addition, the random value at the time of conditional device lottery is acquired by step S49. In step S50, a process is performed to determine whether the acquired random number value is a random value corresponding to one of the condition device numbers using the condition device lottery table.

In the next step S51, the AT lottery means 63c executes AT lottery using the above-described AT lottery table (FIG. 33) based on the winning condition device. In this lottery, in addition to winning the AT, the AT lottery state may be shifted although the AT is not won.
Next, proceeding to step S52, the main game state control means 63k updates the main game state in the game. For example, when an AT is won in the lottery of step S51, control is performed so that the main game state 0 is updated to the main game state 1 (AT precursor).

In the next step S53, the main control board 60 (particularly, the push order instruction number selection means 63e) executes a push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF). This process is a process of selecting a push order instruction number according to the current main game state and the selected condition device. If it progresses to step S53, it will transfer to the process of FIG. 52 mentioned later. Although details will be described later, in this process, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72 in the game displaying the push order instruction information.
Next, proceeding to step S54, the main control board 60 (particularly the effect group number selection means 63f) executes the effect group number setting process (M_ACT_GRP). This process is a process of selecting an effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device. When the process proceeds to step S54, the process proceeds to the process of FIG.

In the next step S55, interrupt processing is prohibited. The reason why the interrupt process is prohibited is to control the interrupt process not to be performed during the execution of the symbol stop signal set process (S_IF2_SET) in the next step S56.
And it progresses to step S56 and performs a symbol stop signal set process. This process is a process for transmitting (outputting) information (test signal) about the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing to the testing machine from the slot machine 10 based on the condition device won in the game. is there. When the process proceeds to step S56, the process proceeds to the process of FIG.

In the state where the slot machine 10 and the test machine are connected, in this main process, at the start of the game, a symbol stop signal is transmitted (output) to the test machine at each game, step S56. On the other hand, when the slot machine 10 is put on the market (when installed in a hall or the like), the slot machine 10 is not connected to the test machine, so an actual symbol stop signal is transmitted to the test machine. Although it does not do, even after it is installed in the hall, for example, every game, the process of step S56 is executed.
After step S56, the process proceeds to step S57, and the interrupt process prohibited in step S55 is permitted.

The command transmission table 2 set process in the next step S58 is a process for storing the head address where the data of the command transmission table 2 is stored in the HL register. Here, as shown in FIG. 44 to be described later, the head address in which the data of the command transmission table 2 is stored is “1D32”. Therefore,
HL register value = 1D32
It becomes.
In the next step S59, a control command continuous set process (M_CMD_LIST) is executed. This process is a process for transmitting a command to the sub-control board 80 based on the command transmission table 2 set in step S58. When the process proceeds to step S59, the process proceeds to the process of FIG.

In step S60, a reel rotation start preparation process (M_REEL_READY) is executed. If it progresses to step S60, it will transfer to the process of FIG. 58 mentioned later.
In step S61, the reel control unit 63g starts rotating the reel 31. In the next step S62, the stop acceptance of the reel 31 is checked. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 is received, and when the operation signal is received, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the lottery result of the condition device and the position of the reel 31, The reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

  In the next step S63, the reel control means 63g checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S64. In step S64, it is determined whether or not all the reels 31 are stopped. When it is determined that all the reels 31 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S65. When it is determined that all the reels 31 are not stopped, the process returns to step S62. .

In step S65, when pressing order indication information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72 in the game, the acquired number data clear process is performed to delete the information. This process is a process of setting the acquired number data of the address “F00E” to “0”.
In the next step S66, the symbol display is determined. Here, the winning determination means 63h determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has been stopped on the active line. Then, the symbol combination flag (_FL_WIN) is updated in accordance with the stopped symbol combination. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol combination has stopped at the active line, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to “1”.
In step S67, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. If it is determined that a symbol display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S76. If it is determined that no display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S68.

  Here, since the stop of the reel 31 is executed based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 does not normally stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the display determination of the symbol, when a symbol that should not be displayed (a kicked symbol) is displayed on the active line, it is determined to be abnormal, and the process proceeds to step S76 to perform an unrecoverable error process. Run. This symbol combination abnormality error is referred to as an “E5” error, and “E5” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72, and the main process is stopped.

When an unrecoverable error occurs, it is necessary to turn on / off the power and reset the set value in order to cancel the error. When an unrecoverable error occurs, the power is turned off, the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, and the power is turned on. As a result, a predetermined range (setting value information, RT information, winning combination information) of the RWM 61 is cleared. Then, a set value is set, and if there is no other error, a return process is performed.
On the other hand, when a recoverable error such as a full error occurs, the error content is displayed and the process is stopped. However, when the hall clerk performs an error canceling operation (removing the error factor) and operates the reset switch 53, It is determined whether or not the error has been cancelled. When it is determined that the error has been cancelled, the processing is resumed.

In step S68, the medal payout number updating process (FIG. 59) is performed in accordance with the winning combination. This process is based on the display determination in step S66. When a small combination (a combination having a medal payout) wins, the medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) and the medal payout number data corresponding to the winning small combination. Update the buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL).
In the next step S69, it is determined whether or not a special combination (1BB) has been won. When it is determined that the special combination has won, the process proceeds to step S70, and when it is determined that the special combination has not won, the process proceeds to step S72.
In step S70, the waiting time for winning a special role is set. This process is a process for setting a predetermined value in the BC register. In this embodiment, “2000” (equivalent to about 4470 ms) is set in the BC register. More specifically, B register value = “3” (00000011B) and C register value = “208” (11101000B) are set. Then, in the next step S71, a 2-byte time waiting process (R_2BYTE_WAIT) is executed. When the process proceeds to step S71, the process proceeds to FIG.

  As described above, the wait time is set when the special combination is won, during which the sub control board 80 outputs an effect at the time of the special combination and the player performs the bet switch 40 during the presentation period. This is in order not to cancel the effect due to the operation. Thus, by providing the wait time in the main process and stopping the main process, it is possible to reliably show the player the effect at the time of winning the special role. The interrupt process is configured to be executed even while the 2-byte time wait process (R_2BYTE_WAIT) is being executed.

In the next step S72, the payout means 63i pays out medals corresponding to the winning combination. In this process, when the number of stored sheets is less than “50”, the number of stored sheets is added until the number of stored sheets reaches “50”. When the number of stored sheets reaches “50” or more, the hopper motor 36 Is controlled to pay out medals from the hopper 35a to the player.
Next, the process proceeds to step S73. In step S73, the main control board 60 performs a game end check process (M_GAME_CHK). When the processing proceeds to step 72, the processing proceeds to the processing of FIG.

  In step S73, the signal of the full sensor 38, which is the D5 bit of the input port 2, is determined, and when it is on, a full error is displayed. The full error is referred to as “FE error” in this embodiment, and “FE” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72.

In the next step S74, an output request at the end of the game is set. This process is a process for setting a control command for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has ended.
The “output request set” is often executed also in the process described below, but means a process of setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 as in step S74. To do. Further, the control command here does not mean only the control command that is actually transmitted, but also the control command that is the basis of the control command that is actually transmitted.
In step S75, the main control board 60 executes control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). This process is a process of storing a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in the control command buffer (_BF_SUBCMD of addresses “F113” to “F153”).
And when the process of step S75 is complete | finished, it returns to step S40 again.
As described above, the main process shown in FIG. 41 is repeated for each game.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the game start set (MS_GAME_SET) in step S42 of FIG.
First, in step S80, a game standby display time is set (stored in a predetermined storage area (not shown) of the RWM 61). In this embodiment, “26846” interrupt (≈60,000 ms, that is, about 60 seconds (1 minute)) is set as the game standby display time. When the game standby display time is set in step S81, the value is subtracted by “1” for each interrupt process from this point.

  When the game standby display time becomes “0”, the acquired number data is cleared in step S45 (waiting for medal insertion) in FIG. As a result, “00” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72. For example, even if the number of medals paid out in the previous game is “9” and the player pays out by operating the checkout switch 43 and ends the game, “00” is displayed after about one minute. Is done. Thereby, it has the effect that a vacant stand can be reduced by being able to recognize a hall clerk and another player as a vacant stand.

Next, the process proceeds to step S81, and the push order instruction number initialization process is executed. This process corresponds to a process of clearing the push order instruction number stored in the address “F0B8” of the RWM 61.
In the next step S82, data of the symbol combination display flag is acquired. This process is a process of storing the symbol combination on the active line after the reel 31 is stopped in the previous game, that is, the data of the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) in the A register.
In the next step S83, it is determined whether or not a 1BB operation symbol is displayed. In this process, when the D3 bit stored in the A register value is “1”, it is determined as “Yes”, and when it is “0”, it is determined as “No”. When it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S84, and when it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S87.

  In step S84, the acquirable number at the time of 1BB operation (at the time of 1BB game) is stored. This process is a process of storing (storing) the value of “450” in the above-described “_CT_BIG_PAY” (RWM 61). This “450” is the maximum number that can be acquired in a 1BB game. Then, the process proceeds to step S87.

In the next step S87, an operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is generated. In step S87, the following processes 1) to 5) are executed.
1) First, the address of the operation state flag is stored in the HL register. As described above, since the address of the operation state flag is “F015”, H register value = “F0” and L register value = “15”.
2) Next, "OR" the A register value and the address information stored in the HL register, and store the operation result in the A register. Here, the data of the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) in step S82 is stored in the A register, and the address information stored in the HL register is information on the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION).

Specifically, it is as follows, for example.
Example 1)
When a 1BB symbol combination is displayed,
A register value: 00001000B
HL register address information value: 00000000B
A register value after "OR" operation: 00001000B
It becomes.
Example 2)
When 1BB symbol combination is already displayed and 1BB and RB are active,
A register value: 00000000B
HL register address information value: 00011000B
A register value after "OR" operation: 00011000B
It becomes.

Example 3)
When 1BB symbol combination is already displayed and 1BB is active but RB is not active,
A register value: 00000000B
HL register address information value: 00001000B
A register value after "OR" operation: 00001000B
It becomes.

3) Store the A register value in the C register.
For example, taking Example 1) to Example 3) as an example, it is as follows.
Example 1) and Example 3)
A register value: 00001000B
C register value: 00001000B
Example 2)
A register value: 00011000B
C register value: 00011000B

4) An AND operation is performed on the information stored in the A register and the information in which the bit corresponding to 1BB is set to “1”, and the operation result is stored in the A register.
For example, taking Example 1) to Example 3) as an example, it is as follows.
Example 1) and Example 3)
A register value: 00001000B
Information in which the bit corresponding to 1BB is set to “1”: 00001000B
A register value after AND operation: 00001000B
Example 2)
A register value: 00011000B
Information in which the bit corresponding to 1BB is set to “1”: 00001000B
A register value after AND operation: 00001000B

5) Perform an operation to rotate the A register value to the left and store the operation result in the A register.
For example, taking Example 1) to Example 3) as an example, it is as follows.
A register value (before operation): 00001000B
A register value (after calculation): 00010000B

In the next step S88, the operating state flag is updated. In this process, the A register value and the C register value are “ORed”, and the calculation result is stored in the A register.
For example, taking Example 1) to Example 3) as an example, it is as follows.
Example 1)
A register value: 00010000B
C register value: 00001000B
A register value (after operation): 00011000B
Example 2)
A register value: 00010000B
C register value: 00011000B
A register value (after operation): 00011000B
Example 3)
A register value: 00010000B
C register value: 00001000B
A register value (after operation): 00011000B

In the next step S89, the operating state flag is saved (stored). In this process, the value stored in the A register is stored in the address of the RWM 61 (that is, the operating state flag) indicated by the HL register value. Thereby, the information on the operation state flag up to that point is replaced with the information on the operation state flag updated in step S88.
For example, as in Example 1), when a 1BB symbol combination is displayed (at the time of 1BB winning), the D3 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag is changed from “0” to “1”.
Further, as in Example 2, when 1BB and RB are in operation, the states are maintained (the D3 bit corresponding to 1BB and the D4 bit corresponding to RB of the operation state flag are “1”).

  Furthermore, as in Example 3), when 1BB is operating, but RB is not operating, the D4 bit corresponding to RB of the operating state flag is changed from “0” to “1”. Although details on this point will be described later, in this embodiment, in the 1BB game, the RB operation flag is turned off (“0”) at the end of the 2 games (or at the time of the 2nd prize), but in the 1BB game, When the end condition is not satisfied (when the D3 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag is “1”), it is set to “1” in this step S89 (game start set).

In the next step S90, it is determined whether or not the RB operation has started. In this process, the information stored in the A register and the information stored in the C register are “XORed”, the calculation result is stored in the A register, and it is determined whether or not the zero flag is “1”. It is.
Taking Example 1) to Example 3) as an example, it is as follows.
Example 1) and Example 3)
A register value: 00011000B
C register value: 00001000B
A register value (after “XOR” operation): 00010000B (zero flag ≠ 1)
Example 2)
A register value: 00011000B
C register value: 00011000B
A register value (after “XOR” operation): 00000000B (zero flag = 1)

When the zero flag is “1”, the determination is “No” and the process proceeds to step S92. When the zero flag is not “1”, the determination is “Yes” and the process proceeds to step S91. As described above, in step S90,
a) At the start of 1BB game b) After the RB operation is finished, if the end condition of 1BB game is not satisfied, it is judged as “Yes”.
In the next step S91, the number of games and the number of winnings at the time of RB operation are stored. This process corresponds to a process of saving (storing) “2” in the game number counter “_CT_BONUS_PLAY” at the time of RB operation and saving (storing) “2” in the number-of-wins counter “_CT_BONUS_WIN” at the time of RB operation. . Then, the process proceeds to step S92.

  Note that the game number counter “_CT_BONUS_PLAY” at the time of RB operation and the winning number counter “_CT_BONUS_WIN” at the time of RB operation are both set to “2” as an initial value, and the number of games or the number of winnings is “1”, respectively. It is a counter that is decremented by “1” as it increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initial value of these counter values is set to “0”, and is incremented by “1” every time the number of games or winnings increases by “1”, and these counter values are “2”. It may be determined whether or not it has been reached.

  In the next step S92, based on the data of the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S82, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of replay is displayed (whether the replay has won a prize). When it is determined that the replay symbol combination is displayed, the process proceeds to step S93. When it is determined that the replay pattern combination is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S95.

In step S93, the main control board 60 reads a bet medal. This process is a process of reading the number of medals bet in the previous game. In step S94, automatic bet number data is set. This process is a process of updating the data of “_NB_REP_MEDAL” that stores the automatic bet number (stores “3”).
In step S95, the command transmission table 1 is set. This process is a process of storing the head address where the data of the command transmission table 1 is stored in the HL register. Here, as shown in FIG. 43, the head address in which the data of the command transmission table 1 is stored is “1D1F”. Therefore,
HL register value = 1D1F
It becomes.

  In the next step S59, a control command continuous set process (M_CMD_LIST) is executed. This process is a process for transmitting a command to the sub-control board 80 based on the command transmission table 1 set in step S95. When the process proceeds to step S59, the process proceeds to the process of FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S97, and the process proceeds to a medal acceptance start process (MS_MEDAL_START) (FIG. 48).

FIG. 43A is a diagram showing the command transmission table 1 set in step S95, and FIG. 43B is a diagram showing the relationship between each data of the command transmission table 1 and the address.
In FIG. 6A, “(TBL_CMD_LEV1_E-$-1) / 2” on the first line defines the number of command transmissions, and this data is address “1D1F” as shown in FIG. It means that the value is “06H”. “(TBL_CMD_LEV1_E-$-1) / 2” indicates a value obtained by dividing the number (“12”) from “1D20” to “1D2B”, which is an address constituting the command data, by “2”. Becomes “6”.

In this embodiment, each address stores 1-byte data, and one control command transmitted to the sub-control means 80 is composed of 2-byte data. For example, in the operating state, the upper 1 byte data is “@CMD_ACTION” and the lower 1 byte data is “_FL_ACTION”. The upper 1-byte data is control command data (definition data) meaning a command type, and the lower 1-byte data is control command data meaning its contents (variable). In FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 described later, “LOW” indicates lower data.
Here, the data of “_FL_ACTION” means the data of the operation state flag of the address “F015”. Therefore, in the command transmission table 1, “15H” is stored in the address “1D20”. This data indicates that the lower address of the RWM 61 is “15” data. In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, “F0H” is stored in the Q register as an address indicating the upper address (Q register value = F0H).

“@CMD_ACTION” is definition data of the operating state, and is stored in the address “1D21” in the present embodiment.
As described above, the command in the operating state is “32H (00110010B)” in which the upper 1-byte data is stored in the address “1D21”, and the lower 1-byte data is the value stored in the address “F015”. For example, when “00000001” is stored in “F015”, the control command indicating the operating state is “00110010/00000001” (“/” indicates the boundary between the upper data and the lower data).

The command data indicating the number of 1BB acquired (lower order) is data in which upper data is definition data “@CMD_BB_LOW” and lower data is “LOW_CT_BIG_PAY + 0”. The definition data “@CMD_BB_LOW” is “41H” stored in the address “1D23”, and the lower data is the value stored in the address “1D22” as the lower address (the upper address is “F0” as described above). )), That is, data stored in “F060”.
Similarly to the above, the command data indicating the number of 1BB acquired (upper) is the data including “@CMD_BB_HIG”, which is the definition data, and “LOW_CT_BIG_PAY + 1”, which is the lower data. The definition data “@CMD_BB_HIG” is “42H” stored in the address “1D25”, and the lower data is the value stored in the address “1D24” as the lower address (the upper address is “F0” as described above). )), That is, data stored in “F061”.

In the command data indicating the main gaming state, the upper data corresponds to the definition data “@ CMD_INF1”, and this value is “60H” stored in the address “1D27”. The lower data is “LOW_NB_GAM_STS”, and the data stored in the address “1D26” is the lower value (the value of the upper address is “F0” in the same manner as described above. Data stored in “F08F”.
In the command data indicating the number of precursor games and the number of AT games, the upper data corresponds to the definition data “@ CMD_INF2”, and this value is “61H” stored in the address “1D29”. The lower data is “LOW_CT_GAM_STS”, which is the data of the address at which the value stored in the address “1D28” is lower, that is, the data stored in “F099”.

In the command data indicating the RT state, the upper data corresponds to the definition data “@CMD_RT_STS”, and this value is “33H” stored in the address “1D2B”. The lower data is “LOW_NB_RT_STS”, which is the data of the address at which the value stored in the address “1D2A” is lower, that is, the data stored in “F001”.
As described above, the command data defined in the command transmission table 1 in the present embodiment is stored in order from the address “1D1F” to “1D2B” of the RWM 61.

  As is apparent from the above, in this embodiment, six control commands are transmitted using the game / command transmission table 1. For this reason, for example, even when not playing a 1BB game, the number of 1BB acquired (lower) and (upper) are transmitted. The data of the number of 1BB acquired when not playing 1BB game is “0” as a matter of course. For example, it is also possible to determine whether or not the game is in 1BB game, and transmit the 1BB acquired number (lower) and (upper) only when it is determined that the game is in 1BB game.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, even if the 1BB game is not being played, if the control command for the number of 1BB acquired (lower order) and (upper order) is transmitted as “0” data, the game is in the 1BB game. Since transmission of the control command based on the control command transmission table 1 can be executed without determining whether or not there is, the processing can be simplified.
In addition, in the transmission of control commands using the command transmission table 1, the transmission order of each control command in the operating state, the number of 1BB acquired, the main game state, the number of precursor games / AT games, and the RT state is shown in FIG. The control commands are not limited to those, and the control commands are not limited to these six types.

44A is a diagram showing the command transmission table 2 set in step S58 of FIG. 41, and FIG. 44B is a diagram showing the relationship between each data and address of the command transmission table 2. .
In (A) in the figure, “(TBL_CMD_LEV2_E-$-1) / 2” on the first line defines the number of command transmissions, and this data is address “1D32” as shown in (B) in the figure. And its value is “03H”. “(TBL_CMD_LEV2_E-$-1) / 2” indicates a value obtained by dividing the number (“6”) from the address “1D33” to “1D38” constituting the command data by “2”. 3 ".

As described in the command transmission table 1, each address stores 1-byte data, and one control command transmitted to the sub-control means 80 is composed of 2-byte data. For example, in the push order instruction number, the upper 1-byte data is “@CMD_ORD_INF” and the lower 1-byte data is “LOW_NB_ORD_INF”.
“@CMD_ORD_INF” is the definition data of the push order instruction number, and is “39H” stored in the address “1D34” in the present embodiment.
Further, the lower order data of the push order instruction number is the data of the address whose value stored in the address “1D33” is lower, that is, the data stored in “F0B8”.

  As described above, the control command of the push order instruction number is “39H (00111001B)” in which the upper 1-byte data is stored in the address “1D34”, and the lower 1-byte data is the value stored in the address “F0B8”. Become. For example, when “00000100” is stored in “F0B8”, the command data indicating the pressing order instruction number is “00111001/00000100” (“/” indicates the boundary between the upper data and the lower data).

In the command data indicating the production group number, the upper data corresponds to the definition data “@CMD_ACT_GRP”, and this value is “3AH” stored in the address “1D36”. The lower data is “LOW_NB__ACT_GRP”, which is data of an address at which the value stored in the address “1D35” is lower, that is, data stored in “F0B7”.
In the command data indicating the accessory condition device number, the upper data corresponds to the definition data “@CMD_CND_BNS”, and this value is “3BH” stored in the address “1D38”. The lower data is “LOW_CND_BNS”, and the data stored in the address “1D37” is the lower data, that is, the data stored in “F040”.

As described above, the command data defined in the command transmission table 2 in the present embodiment is stored in order from the address “1D32” to “1D38” of the RWM 61.
In the transmission of control commands using the command transmission table 2, the transmission order of the control commands of the push order instruction number, the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number is not limited to that shown in FIG. It is not limited to these three types of control commands.

Since the command transmission tables 1 and 2 are stored in the data area shown in FIG. 2, the program area can be prevented from being compressed.
Specifically, rather than using the program stored in the program area each time to specify the address of the data to be transmitted, the program area stores the transmission program and the data area stores the above command. If the transmission table is stored, transmission processing can be performed simply by referring to the command transmission table. In particular, when there are two timings at which control commands are continuously transmitted as in the present embodiment, the programs to be used are the same, leading to a reduction in capacity.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a control command continuous set (M_CMD_LIST), which corresponds to the processing in step S59 in FIG. 41 and step S96 in FIG.
The command transmission number set in step S201 corresponds to a process of storing data at the address indicated by the value stored in the HL register in the B register. As described above, when the command transmission table 1 set process (step S95 in FIG. 42) or the command transmission table 2 set process (step S58 in FIG. 41) is executed, the start address of the command transmission table 1 or the command transmission table 2, respectively. Is stored in the HL register. Data corresponding to the number of command transmissions is stored at the head address. For example, when the command transmission table 1 is set, “1D1F” is already stored in the HL register.

Hereinafter, the control command continuous set when the command transmission table 1 is set will be described.
First, as described above, when the command transmission table 1 is set, “1D1F” is already stored in the HL register.
Therefore, when the address data indicated by the value stored in the HL register is stored in the B register,
B register value = 06H (number of command transmissions)
It becomes.
In the next step S202, a table address update process is performed. This process is a process of adding “1” to the value stored in the HL register. For example, when the above command transmission table is set,
HL register value = 1D20 (H)
It becomes.

In step S203, a control command is acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the value stored in the HL register in the E register. For example, when the HL register value is “1D20”, as shown in FIG.
E register value = 15 (H)
It becomes.
(2) “1” is added to the value stored in the HL register, and the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register is stored in the D register.
In the above example,
HL register value = 1D21 (H)
D register value = 32 (H)
It becomes.
(3) “1” is further added to the HL register value.
In the above example,
HL register value = 1D22 (H)
It becomes.

In step S204, control command set 1 processing (R_CMD_SET) is executed. When the process proceeds to step S204, the process proceeds to the process of FIG. This process is a process for transmitting a control command to the sub-control board 80.
Next, the process proceeds to step S205, and it is determined whether or not the present process is completed. In step S205, first, “1” is subtracted from the B register value. Then, it is determined whether or not the B register value is “0”. When it is determined that the B register value is “0”, it is determined that the control command continuous setting process is ended, and the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the B register value is not “0”, the process returns to step S203.

  By the above processing, for example, when the command transmission table 1 is set, six control commands that are the number of command transmissions are generated. As described above, one control command includes upper 1 byte data (definition data) and lower 1 byte data (variable data). Each time a control command is generated, a process for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 is performed by the control command set 1 process in step S204.

On the other hand, when the command transmission table 2 is set, the processing of FIG. 45 is as follows.
First, in step S201, “1D32” is already stored in the HL register. Therefore, when the process of storing the data at the address indicated by the value stored in the HL register in the B register is performed,
B register value = 03H
It becomes.

In the next step S202, a table address update process is performed. This process is a process of adding “1” to the value stored in the HL register. So in this example,
HL register value = 1D33 (H)
It becomes.

In step S203, a control command is acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the value stored in the HL register in the E register. For example, when the HL register value is “1D33” as described above, as shown in FIG.
E register value = B8 (H)
It becomes.
(2) “1” is added to the value stored in the HL register, and the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register is stored in the D register.
In this example,
HL register value = 1D34 (H)
D register value = 39 (H)
It becomes.
(3) “1” is further added to the HL register value.
In this example,
HL register value = 1D35 (H)
It becomes.

In step S204, control command set 1 processing (R_CMD_SET) (FIG. 46) is executed.
Then, the process proceeds to step S205, and it is determined whether or not this process is finished. In step S205, first, “1” is subtracted from the B register value. Then, it is determined whether or not the B register value is “0”. When it is determined that the B register value is “0”, it is determined that the control command continuous setting process is ended, and the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the B register value is not “0”, the process returns to step S203.

  By the above processing, for example, when the command transmission table 2 is set, three control commands that are the number of command transmissions are generated. As described above, one control command includes upper 1 byte data (definition data) and lower 1 byte data (variable data). Each time a control command is generated, a process for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 is performed by the control command set 1 process in step S204.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the processing of the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET).
First, in step S501, a second control command is acquired. This process is a process of acquiring the address of the RWM 61 based on the data stored in the Q register and the E register and storing the data stored in the address of the RWM 61 in the A register.
Here, “F0” is stored in the Q register when the power is turned on. The E register stores a predetermined value in step S203 of FIG. For example, when the command transmission table 1 is set, “15H” is stored in the E register in the first process. The address when the Q register value is the upper address and the E register value is the lower address, that is, the value stored in “F015” (the value of the operating state flag) is stored in the A register value.
Further, the data stored in the A register is stored in the E register.
As described above, the data of the operation state flag is stored in the A register and the E register.

In the next step S502, interrupt prohibition processing is executed. This process is the same as step S55. In the next step S503, control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET) (FIG. 47) is executed. In step S504, the interrupt process prohibited in step S502 is canceled (that is, interrupt permission) is executed. Through the above processing, interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of the control command set 2.
In the control command set 2, the control command is written as shown below. While the control command set 2 is being executed, interrupt processing is prohibited as described above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunction (such as writing to an address different from the normal write address) due to execution of interrupt processing during control command write processing.

Here, an interrupt flag for storing the prohibition / release of the interrupt is provided. The interrupt flag is turned on when the timing for executing the next interrupt process (within 2.235 ms from the time when the interrupt process is disabled) comes after the interrupt process is disabled in step S502. The main CPU 63 then clears the interrupt flag when canceling the prohibited interrupt processing.
When it is time to execute interrupt processing, the main control board 60 determines whether the interrupt flag is on or off, and determines whether interrupt processing is prohibited / permitted.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET).
First, in step S511, the address of the control command buffer is set. This process is a process for setting the head address of the control command buffer.
Specifically, a value obtained by adding “1” to the start address of the control command buffer (_BF_SUBCMD) (in this embodiment, “F113” as shown in FIG. 16), that is, “F114” is stored in the HL register. . This
HL register value = F114
It becomes.

In the next step S512, a control command write pointer value is acquired. The control command write pointer is for designating which address of the RWM 61 the control command data is to be written. Since the current write pointer is stored, a process for reading the write pointer is performed. The control command write pointer value (_NB_CMDSTORE) is stored in the address “F018” of the RWM 61 (FIG. 16).
In this process, the control command write pointer value is stored in the A register value. For example, when the control command write pointer value (value stored in “F018”) is “1”, the A register value = “1”.

In the next step S513, a designated address is acquired. In this process, a write address (in the RWM 61) is obtained from the start address of the control command buffer and data indicating the current position of the write pointer.
Specifically, a process is performed in which a value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is used as the HL register value. For example,
HL register value = F114 (H)
A register value = 1 (H)
HL register value (after addition) = F115 (H)
It becomes.

Next, proceeding to step S514, data at a specified address is acquired. This process is a process of reading data stored in the storage area of the RWM 61 at the address obtained in step S513 of the preprocess.
Specifically, a value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is used as the HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
In the above example,
HL register value = F115 (H)
A register value = 1 (H)
HL register value (after addition) = F116 (H)
It becomes.

In “control command <64?” In the next step S515, it is determined whether or not the value of the designated address data (the A register value stored in step S514) is “0”. , “Yes”.
Here, “No” is determined in step S515 when the A register value is not “0”. When the A register value is not “0”, this means that data has already been written in the control command buffer at the address indicated by the control command write pointer value (_NB_CMDSTORE), and data cannot be written to the address. In this way, when there is data at the designated address, the data writing process is not executed, so that overwriting when there is data at the designated address is prevented.
When “Yes” is determined in step S515, the process proceeds to step S516, and when “No” is determined, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the “store control command in RWM” in the next step S516, “1” is subtracted from the HL register value. Then, the E register value is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and the D register value is stored at the address indicated by the “HL + 1” register value. That is,
HL register value = HL register value-1
E register value = address value indicated by HL register value D register value = address value indicated by “HL + 1” register value
For example, when the HL register value when proceeding to step S516 is “F116”,
E register value = value stored at address “F115” D register value = value stored at address “F116”.
Here, the data stored in the D register and the data stored in the E register become one control command. The data stored in the D register is definition data indicating the command type, and the data stored in the E register is variable data indicating the contents of the command type.

In the next step S517, the control command write pointer value is updated.
In this processing, first, the control command write pointer value (value stored in the address “F018”) is stored in the HL register.
Next, “1” is added to the value stored in the HL register. Here, when “64” (decimal number) is exceeded as a result of adding “1”, it is set to “0”.
Then, the value after addition (the value stored in the HL register) is stored in the control command write pointer value (address “F018”). This completes the processing according to this flowchart.

As described above, six control commands defined in the command transmission table 1 are transmitted in each game and game start set (MS_GAME_SET) (steps S95 and S96). Further, after lottery of condition devices, three control commands defined in the command transmission table 2 are transmitted (steps S58 and S59).
Here, among the three control commands defined in the command transmission table 2, the accessory condition device number (F040), that is, information indicating whether or not 1BB is won is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. On the other hand, the winning and replay condition device number of the address “F039” is not transmitted. As a result, for example, even if a go-to action is performed on the sub-control board 80 or a communication line between the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 80, it is prevented that the winning and replay condition device numbers are illegally known. can do.

Further, as defined in the command transmission table 2, a push order instruction number (information stored in the address “F0B8”) is transmitted to each game and sub-control board 80. However, in FIG. 52 to be described later, when it is not in the instruction state by step S214, that is, during non-AT, the push order instruction number is not stored in RWM 61 (address “F0B8”) in step S218, so the data of address “F0B8” is “0”. For this reason, even in a non-AT game, even if the game wins the push order bell (for example, the condition device number “23”, etc.), the push order instruction number stored in the RWM 61 is “0”. The order instruction number “0” is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Therefore, similarly to the above, it is impossible to illegally obtain the push order instruction number (correct push order) by the goto action and to operate the stop switch 42 in the correct push order (acquisition of the high-bell) in the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent a go-to action due to illegal acquisition of the correct answer pressing order.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the production group number is transmitted, but the production group number does not have a one-to-one correspondence with the condition device number as shown in FIG. For this reason, for example, in the game in which the sub-control board 80 receives the information of the effect group number “13”, it can be determined that the winning and replay condition device numbers “23” to “28” are won. However, it is impossible to determine which winning and replay condition device number is won. Therefore, the correct answer push order in the game is not known. Therefore, similarly to the above, even if the production group number is illegally acquired by the goto action, the correct push order in the game cannot be known, so the goto action can be prevented.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the medal acceptance start (MS_MEDAL_START) in step S97 of FIG.
First, in step S131, the bet medal number data is cleared. That is, it is a process of clearing the bet number in the previous game, and specifically, a process of setting the value of the medal bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) to “0” is performed.
Next, it progresses to step S132 and the process which extinguishes insertion display LED (73e-73g) is performed. Specifically, a process of setting the D0 to D2 bits of the input number display LED signal data (_PT_MEDAL_LED) to “0” is performed.
In the next step S133, the medal management flag is initialized. Specifically, processing is performed to set the D0, D2 to D4, D6, and D7 bits of the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) to “0”.

  In the next step S134, the main control board 60 checks the operating state flag. Here, the operation state flag is checked in order to determine whether or not the replay operation is being performed in the next step S135. In the present embodiment, in step S134, the value of the D0 bit (replay) of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is read.

Next, the process proceeds to step S135, and based on the reading in step S134, it is determined whether or not it is during replay operation, that is, whether or not the D0 bit is “1”. When the D0 bit is “1”, that is, when it is determined that the replay operation is being performed, the process proceeds to step S136, and when it is determined that the replay operation is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S148.
If it is determined that the replay operation is not being performed and the process proceeds to step S148, a process for turning on the blocker 45 is executed, and the process according to this flowchart is terminated. When the blocker 45 is turned on, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 are not returned but are detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b and sent to the hopper 35a. That is, when the replay is not operated, the medal maintenance is uniformly permitted.
Therefore, in the medal acceptance start process of this flowchart, the processes after step S136 correspond to the medal automatic bet process during the replay operation.

  In step S136, a standby time during replay operation is set. In this embodiment, in order to set about 500 ms as the wait time, a count value “237” (237 × 2.235 ms = about 529.7 ms) of the number of interrupts is set. For this reason, “00000000B” is set as the B register value, and “11101101B” is set as the C register value. In step S137, a 2-byte time waiting process is executed. This process is a process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt and waiting until it becomes “0”.

This standby process is provided to prevent the replay display LED 73a from being turned on immediately after the game ends (step S141) or automatically bet immediately after the game ends (step S144). Because this is not preferred). Thereby, the timing of automatic betting can be made appropriate.
Further, for example, at the time of replay winning, it is possible to provide the player with a replay winning effect (including sound effects at the time of replay winning) using a 2-byte waiting time process (2-byte waiting time process). During the game, the progress of the game is stopped, so the production cannot be canceled.)

Further, the betting sound at the time of automatic betting is output based on the control command stored in step S142 and step S143.
It should be noted that the wait time can be varied depending on the type of replay won. For example, at the time of transition replay winning, a wait time different from that at the time of normal replay winning (longer than at the time of normal replay winning) may be set.

Next, the process proceeds to step S138, where the number of stored sheets is read (processing for reading the number of currently stored sheets). Here, the stored number display data (_NB_CREDIT_LED) is read to check the stored number.
In the next step S139, it is determined whether or not the stored number is the limit number (in this embodiment, 50). When it is determined that the number is the limit number, the process proceeds to step S141. When it is determined that the number is not the limit number, the process proceeds to step S140. The processing here is

In step S140, control is performed so that the blocker is turned on, that is, acceptance of medals is permitted. Then, the process proceeds to step S141.
As described above, first, when it is not during the replay operation, the blocker 45 is always turned on to accept the medal. This is because when the replay operation is not in progress, even if the number of stored games was the upper limit (50) in the previous game, the bet medals (3 in the normal game) are consumed, and that amount can be bet. .

Second, at the time of the replay operation, if the number of stored medals is not the limit number, the blocker 45 is turned on to accept the medal. This is because when the number of stored medals is not the limit number, at least the number of stored medals can be added by caring for medals.
Thirdly, at the time of the replay operation, if the number of stored medals is the limit number, the blocker 45 is not turned on (the blocker 45 is kept off until then). This is because when the replay operation is performed and the number of stored medals is the upper limit number, medals cannot be betted and the number of stored medals cannot be added, so that no medals are accepted.

In step S141, the replay display LED is turned on. In step S141, a process of turning on ("1") the D3 bit of the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) is executed.
Note that the process of actually turning on the replay display LED 73a is performed by the LED display control in step S606 in an interrupt process (FIG. 64) described later.
Thus, since the lighting process of the replay display LED 73a is executed after the execution of the 2-byte time waiting process in step S137, the replay display LED 73a is not lit at the moment when the replay is displayed (winning), but the replay is displayed. After being turned on, the light is turned on after about 0.5 seconds.

Then, in the next step S142, an output request set process for transmitting a command indicating that an automatic bet has been made is performed on the sub-control board 80, and a control command set 1 process is executed in the next step S143. .
In the next step S144, a process for adding one medal (in this case, means an automatic bet process), that is, an automatic bet (addition) of medals one by one in order to place an automatic bet based on a replay winning. Process. If it progresses to step S144, it will transfer to FIG. 51 mentioned later.

Next, proceeding to step S145, a standby time for automatic betting based on replay is set. In this embodiment, in order to set about 100 ms as the wait time, the count value “46” (46 × 2.235 ms = about 103 ms) of the number of interrupts is set. For this reason, “00000000B” is set as the B register value, and “00101110B” is set as the C register value. In step S146, a 2-byte time waiting process is executed. This process is a process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt and waiting until it becomes “0”. When the 2-byte time waiting process in step S146 is completed, the process proceeds to step S147, where it is determined whether or not the medal limit number (3 sheets) has been reached, and if it is determined that the medal limit number has been reached, the process according to this flowchart ends. To do.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the medal limit number has not been reached, the process returns to step S144, and one medal addition (automatic betting) process is executed again.

  As described above, in the automatic bet at the time of replay winning, the two-byte time waiting process of steps S145 and S146 is executed in accordance with the automatic betting of medals one by one. This is executed every time about 100 ms elapses. As a result, the inserted number display LED signal data (_PT_MEDAL_LED) is also updated every time about 100 ms elapses. Therefore, it is possible to show the player that the turn-on display LEDs 73e to 73g are turned on sequentially (approximately every 100 ms). Further, on the sub-control board 80 side, when an automatic bet sound (sound such as “pull”) is output from the speaker 22, the lighting change of the input display LEDs 73e to 73g can be synchronized with the automatic bet sound.

  Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 48, it is determined whether or not the storage limit number is reached in step S139. If the number is not the storage limit number, processing to turn on the blocker 45 to enable the medal to be inserted (step Although S140) is executed, for example, when a replay is won, it is possible to set the medal care insertion impossible. In the case of such control, when it is determined in step S135 that the replay operation is being performed, the processing in steps S138 to S140 may be eliminated.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a 2-byte time wait process (R_2BYTE_WAIT).
In step S31, it is determined whether or not a 2-byte waiting time has elapsed. This process determines the value of the BC register and determines whether it is “0” (whether the B register value is “0” and the C register value is “0”). Specifically, for example, when B register value = “1” and C register value = “0”, it is determined that the value is not “0”. Alternatively, when the B register value = “0” and the C register value = “0”, it is determined as “0”.
When it is determined in step S31 that it is “0”, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S32.

  In step S32, an interrupt waiting process (C_INTR_WAIT; FIG. 50) is executed. This process is a process of waiting until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) elapses. Then, when the interrupt waiting process is completed, the process proceeds to step S33, the waiting time update process is executed, and the process returns to step S31. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the BC register value. Specifically, for example, when B register value = “1” and C register value = “0”, subtracting “1” results in B register value = “0”, C register value = “255” (decimal number) ) Alternatively, for example, when B register value = “0” and C register value = “1”, subtracting “1” results in B register value = “0” and C register value = “0”.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing interrupt wait processing (C_INTR_WAIT).
In the acquisition of the interrupt counter value in step S35, the interrupt counter value is stored in the A register. Here, in this embodiment, the interrupt counter value is stored as 16 bits in the two addresses “F02B” and “F02C”. However, in step S41, the value stored in the low-order 8-bit address “F02C”. Is stored in the A register.

In step S36, it is determined whether or not the interrupt counter value (the lower 8 bits stored in the address “F02C”) has changed. Specifically, a process of subtracting “interrupt counter value stored in address“ F02C ”” from “A register value” is executed, and the operation result is “0” (zero flag = “1”). , “No” is determined. When it is determined that there has been a change, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. When it is determined that there has been no change, the process of step S36 is continued.
The zero flag is a flag for determining whether or not the calculated result is “0”, and indicates a specific bit of a flag register (F register) provided in the MPU. When the specific bit is “0” (zero flag = “0”), it indicates that the operation result is not “0”. When the specific bit is “1” (zero flag = “1”), the operation result is “0”. ".

  As described above, when an 8-bit value is used as the interrupt counter value, the interrupt counter value is stored only in the address “F02B”. Therefore, in step S35, the value of the address “F02B” is stored in the A register. In step S36, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the address “F02B” has changed.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the process of adding one medal (MS_MEDAL_INC) in step S144 of FIG.
Note that the processing for adding one medal in FIG. 48 is described as a subroutine in the automatic bet processing at the time of replay winning in this embodiment, but not only at the time of automatic replay betting, This process is commonly used when a storage bet is based on the operation of the bet switch 40. Thus, even when the bet processing to be executed is different, the program capacity can be reduced by using the common processing (program).

First, in step S171, the main control board 60 reads a bet medal. In the next step S172, a process of adding “1” to the read bet medal number (“+1”) is performed. Then, the calculation result is stored in the C register. For example, if the number of bet medals so far was “0”, by adding “1”,
C register value = 00000001B
It becomes.

In this process, the value of the medal bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) stored in the RWM 61 is read (step S171), the read bet medal number data is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register), and the value of the A register is stored. Is a process of adding (1) to and storing (updating) the A register value after the addition in the medal bet number data.
For example, if the read bet medal number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) is “0”
_NB_PLAY_MEDAL = 0
A register value = 00000000B
A register value = 00000001B (after adding “1”)
_NB_PLAY_MEDAL = 1
It becomes.

In the next step S175, the main control board 60 performs display clear processing for the acquisition number display LED 72. In the present embodiment, the acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT) stored in the RWM 61 is cleared.
In this processing, an operation is performed so that the value of the A register becomes “0” (for example, an exclusive OR of the A register value and the A register value), and the A register value after the operation is stored in the acquired number data. The process to be (updated) is executed.
The process of actually displaying the acquired number display LED 72 is performed by the LED display control (step S606) in the interrupt process.
Further, as described above, the medal one-piece addition process in FIG. 51 is executed in any of the automatic bet process at the time of replay winning, the bet for betting the medal, and the storage bet based on the operation of the bet switch 40 When these processes are executed, the acquired number data is cleared and the display of the acquired number display LED 72 is updated.

Next, proceeding to step S176, the main control board 60 generates lighting data for the input display LEDs 73e to 73g. Note that the process of actually turning on the input display LEDs 73e to 73g is performed in the LED display control (step S606) in the interrupt process described later, as described above.
Here, the insertion display LED lighting data is generated one by one. Therefore, when the number of inserted sheets is “3”, the process is performed three times.
When the process proceeds to step S176 for the first time, the data at the time of loading one sheet is generated as the number-of-insertion display LED data, and the process proceeds to the next step S177. Judge whether or not. If it is determined that all the data for the number of inserted sheets has not been generated, the process proceeds to step S176, and the generated number-of-inserted display LED data is generated again. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S177 that the generation of lighting data for the number of inserted sheets has been completed (for example, when three sheets of insertion display LED lighting data are generated when three sheets are inserted), the process proceeds to step S178.

In step S178, the main control board 60 performs control to store lighting data of the inserted number display LED in the RWM 61 (inserted number display LED signal data (_PT_MEDAL_LED)).
The actual lighting control using the inserted number display LED signal data is performed by an interrupt process described later.

After step S178, the process proceeds to step S179, and the main control board 60 sets the medal limit number.
Here, the medal limit number means the maximum number of medals that can be bet in the game (or the number of medals that must be bet in the game). Specifically, when the maximum number of medals that can be bet differs for each RT, it means the maximum number of medals that can be bet on that RT. In particular, in the present embodiment, it is set to play a game by betting three medals in any RT. Therefore, the limit number of medals in this embodiment is three. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, during normal (other than 1BB game), the medal limit number is set to 3, and during 1BB game, the medal limit number is set to 2 (that is, a game with 2 bets in 1BB game). Etc.).

  Next, proceeding to step S180, the main control board 60 performs betting medal reading processing (same as step S171). In the next step S181, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the bet number is a limit number. Specifically, by subtracting the bet number from the medal limit number, if “0”, it is determined that the bet number is the limit number. When it is determined that the bet number is not the limit number, the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that the bet number is the limit number, the process proceeds to step S182. In step S182, a medal limit flag is set. Here, a process of setting the D7 bit of the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) to “1” is executed. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the pressing order instruction number setting process in step S53 in FIG.
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a main gaming state check table. In FIG. 53, (A) shows the contents of the main gaming state check table, and (B) shows each of the main gaming state check table. It is a figure which shows the relationship between data and an address.
In step S211 of FIG. 52, information on the main gaming state is acquired. This process is a process for storing the data stored in the main game state (_NB_GAM_STS) of the RWM 61 in the A register.
In step S212, the main game state check table (TBL_STS_CHK) is set.

Here, the main game state of the present embodiment includes eight types of main game states 0 to 7 as described above. And as shown to FIG. 53 (A), the data which show whether it is a pushing order instruction | indication state are matched for every main game state. In FIG. 53A, “0 (H)” indicates that it is not in the push order instruction state, and “FF (H)” indicates that it is in the push order instruction state.
Furthermore, the main game state check table is stored in addresses “1ECD” to “1ED4” in the storage area in the ROM 62. The start address is “1ECD”, and the data “0 (H)” stored in this “1ECD” indicates data in the main gaming state 0 (whether or not there is a pressing order instruction).

The description returns to FIG.
“Set of main game state check table” in step S212 is to store the head address of the main game state check table (TBL_STS_CHK) in the HL register. That is,
HL register value = 1 ECD
It becomes.
In the next step S213, designated address data is set. In this process, the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is used as the HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register. That is, it is a process of adding the head address value of the main gaming state check table and the value of the main gaming state, and setting data at an address corresponding to the value after the addition. In other words, the data stored in the main gaming state (_NB_GAM_STS) is used as an offset value, and the corresponding data is obtained from the top address of the main gaming state check table.

For example, when the A register value is “1”,
HL register value = 1 ECD (before addition)
A register value = 1
HL register value = 1 ECE (after addition)
A register value = 0
It becomes.
When the A register value is “2”,
HL register value = 1 ECD (before addition)
A register value = 2
HL register value = 1 ECF (after addition)
A register value = FF (H)
It becomes.
In this way, by performing calculation processing using the data stored in the main game state (_NB_GAM_STS) as an offset value, it is easy to determine whether the current main game state is the push order instruction state or the push order instruction state. Can be calculated.

In the next step S214, it is determined whether or not the instruction state is set. Here, when the A register value is “0”, it is determined that the instruction state is not set (No). On the other hand, when the A register value is “FF (H)”, it is determined as “Yes” (instructed state) because “≠ 0”.
When it is determined that it is not in the instruction state, the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that it is in the instruction state, the process proceeds to step S215.
Therefore, when it is not in the instruction state, that is, during non-AT, “No” is determined in step S214, so that step S218 and step S220 described later are not executed. That is, the push order instruction number of the address “F0B8” is “0”, and the acquired number data (push order instruction data) of the address “F00E” is “0”.

In step S215, a winning number is set. Here, the winning number refers to the condition device number won in the game. The condition device number won in the game (winning and replaying) is stored in “winning and replaying condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR)” in the address “F039” of the RWM 61. In step S215, the value of this address is stored in the A register.
In step S216, the push order instruction number table is set. This process is a process of storing the head address of the ROM 62 in which the push order instruction number table (TBL_NAV_CTL; FIG. 34) is stored in the HL register. This
HL register value = 1 EDC (H)
It becomes.

In the next step S217, designated address data is set. In this process, the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is used as the HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register. In other words, the data stored in the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) is used as an offset value, and the corresponding data is acquired from the head address of the push order instruction number table.
For example, when the A register value is “1”,
HL register value = 1 EDC (before addition)
A register value = 1
HL register value = 1EDD (after addition)
A register value = 0 (data value stored at address "1EDD")
That is, the A register value at this time indicates the push order instruction number corresponding to the condition device number.
In step S218, the push order instruction number is stored in the RWM 61. That is, the value stored in the A register is stored in the push order instruction number (_NB_ORD_INF) of the address “F0B8” of the RWM 61.
In this way, by performing a calculation process using the data stored in the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) as an offset value, a push order number corresponding to the condition device number is easily calculated and stored in the RWM 61. Can do.

In the next step S219, it is determined whether or not there is no push order instruction in the game. This process determines whether or not the value stored in the A register is “0”. When the value is “0”, it is determined that there is no push order instruction (Yes), and when it is not “0”, It is determined that there is a push order instruction (No).
When it is determined that there is no push order instruction, the push order instruction information is not displayed, and the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a push order instruction, the process proceeds to step S220.

In step S220, push order instruction data is generated. This process is a process of adding “100 (decimal number)” to the value stored in the A register and storing the value after the addition in the A register. For example, when the A register value before addition is “2”,
A register value = 2: before addition A register value = 102 (decimal number): after addition
As described above, in this embodiment, a value obtained by adding “100 (decimal number)” to the push order instruction number is referred to as “push order instruction data” and distinguished from the push order instruction number. Further, as will be described later, when the push order instruction data is displayed by the acquisition number display LED 72, for example, when the push order instruction number is “2” and the push order instruction data is “102 (decimal number)”, “= 2” (push order instruction information) is displayed.
The same applies to other push order numbers. For example, when the push order instruction number is “N”, the push order instruction data is “100 + N (decimal number)”, and the push order instruction information (display content) is “= N”.

In the next step S221, the value stored in the A register is stored in the acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT) of the address “F00E” in the RWM 61. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.
In the present embodiment, the maximum number of medals obtained in the game is “9” in the correct push order answer when the push order bell is won. Therefore, when the value stored in the acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT) is less than “100 (decimal number)”, the acquired number data is indicated, and when it is equal to or greater than “100”, it is determined that the data is the pressing order instruction data. It becomes possible to do.

In this way, when the push order instruction information is stored in the acquired number data at the timing of step S53 in FIG. 41, this data is acquired in step S636 in the “LED display control (FIG. 65)” of the interrupt process described later. Then, it is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72 as push order instruction information.
The displayed push order instruction information is cleared at the timing of step S65 in FIG. Further, at the end of the game, when the number acquired by the player due to winning the combination is stored in the acquired number data (step S72), the acquired number is “LED display control (FIG. 65)” as described above. Is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the effect group number setting process in step S54 of FIG.
First, in step S231, the condition device number won in the game is acquired. The condition device number won in the game (winning and replaying) is stored in “winning and replaying condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR)” in the address “F039” of the RWM 61. In step S215, the value of this address is stored in the A register.
In step S232, the effect group number table is set. This process is a process of storing the head address of the ROM 62 in which the effect group number table (TBL_ACT_GRP; FIG. 36) is stored in the HL register. This
HL register value = 1E53 (H)
It becomes.

In the next step S233, designated address data is set. In this process, the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is used as the HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
For example, when the A register value is “1”,
HL register value = 1E53 (before addition)
A register value = 1
HL register value = 1E54 (after addition)
A register value = 1 (data value stored in address “1E54”)
That is, the A register value at this time indicates an effect group number corresponding to the condition device number.
In step S234, the effect group number is stored in the RWM 61. This process is a process of storing the value stored in the A register in the effect group number (_NB_ACT_GRP) of the address “F0B7” of the RWM 61. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.
In other words, the data stored in the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) is used as an offset value, and the corresponding data is acquired from the head address of the effect group number table.
In this way, by performing the calculation process using the data stored in the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) as the offset value, the effect group number corresponding to the condition device number is easily calculated and stored in the RWM 61. Can do.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the symbol stop signal setting process in step S56 of FIG.
Here, prior to the description of FIG. 55, the symbol stop signal tables 1 and 2 will be described.
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the symbol stop signal table 1 (TBL_IF2_SET1), (A) shows the contents of the symbol stop signal table 1, and (B) shows each data and address of the symbol stop signal table 1. It is a figure which shows a relationship.
57 shows the symbol stop signal table 2 (TBL_IF2_SET2), (A) shows the contents of the symbol stop signal table 2, and (B) shows each data and address of the symbol stop signal table 2. It is a figure which shows the relationship.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (A), the symbol stop signal table 1 stores 10 symbol stop signal data. Further, each symbol stop signal data is composed of four pieces of data. For example, “aim for small role” is provided as one symbol stop signal, and the symbol stop signal data for this “aim for small role” consists of “0, 3, 12, 8”.

These four pieces of data from the left are the push order instruction number, the optimum operation timing of the left reel 31 (middle stage), the optimum operation timing of the middle reel 31 (middle stage), and the optimum operation timing of the right reel 31 (middle stage). Is shown.
For example, in “Aim for a small role”
“0”: indicates a pressing order instruction number. “0” indicates that there is no pressing order (unquestioned).
“3”: The optimal operation position of the stop switch 42 of the left reel 31 means that the left stop switch 42 is operated so that the third symbol stops in the middle stage (immediately before passing through the middle stage).
“12”: The optimum operation position of the stop switch 42 of the middle reel 31 means that the middle stop switch 42 is operated so that the 12th symbol stops in the middle stage.
“8”: The optimal operation position of the stop switch 42 on the right reel 31 means that the right stop switch 42 is operated so that the symbol of the eighth stop stops in the middle stage.
In FIG. 56, “127” indicating the operation timing in the push order instruction numbers “1” to “9” means that the operation timing is unquestioned (arbitrary operation position).

In FIG. 17, when the left reel 31 is stopped and the left stop switch 42 is operated at an operation timing at which the third “Replay A” stops at the middle stage, the fifth “Cherry” and the sixth “Watermelon A” are effective. The line can be stopped.
Further, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at an operation timing at which the twelfth “watermelon A” stops at the middle stage when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the twelfth “watermelon A” can be stopped at the active line.
Furthermore, when the right stop switch 42 is operated at an operation timing at which the eighth “red 7” stops in the middle when the right reel 31 is stopped, the ninth “watermelon A” can be stopped at the active line.
From the above, when each stop switch 42 is operated at the above position, there is a possibility of missing a small part, that is, a weak cherry and a strong cherry with condition device numbers “15” and “16”, and a condition device number “48” and When winning “49” weak watermelon and strong watermelon, it is possible to win without missing these winning roles.

  As shown in FIG. 57A, the symbol stop signal table 2 stores one symbol stop signal data. Further, the symbol stop signal data is composed of four pieces of data as described above. The symbol stop signal provided in the symbol stop signal table 2 is a symbol stop signal that enables the winning of the accessory condition device, that is, 1BB can be won, and is data of the pressing order and the operation timing for making the “BAR” uniform. .

Therefore, the pushing order data of the symbol stop signal is “0”, and the operation timing data of each reel 31 is “19, 18, 17”, and “black BAR” is stopped on the effective line. The operation timing is shown.
Also, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), the head address in the ROM 62 of the symbol stop signal table 2 (TBL_IF2_SET2) is set to “2C88”, and the symbol stop is “2C88” to “2C8B”. Signal data is stored.
The symbol stop signal table 2 of FIG. 57 is used in a game that can win 1BB, such as when 1BB alone is won or when the condition device in the 1BB is not won. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which 1BB and a small role or replay are selected and the small role or replay wins, the small role aim of the symbol stop signal table 1 is used (in the game where the replay wins, the small role is aimed. Even if “PB = 1”, the replay wins).

  As described above, the symbol stop signal is a signal including the push order instruction number of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of each reel 31, and is a test signal transmitted to the testing machine. When receiving the symbol stop signal (test signal), the testing machine executes a simulation for operating the stop switch 42 in accordance with the symbol stop signal. Then, when a simulation for operating the stop switch 42 according to the symbol stop signal is executed, it is determined whether or not the reel 31 stops at the correct position, and whether the payout rate is within an appropriate range. Judgment (confirmation) is possible.

Returning to FIG. 55, the symbol stop signal set (S_IF2_SET) will be described.
First, in step S241, the symbol stop signal table 1 shown in FIG. 56 is set. In this process, the head address of the symbol stop signal table 1 is stored in the HL register. That is,
HL register value = 2C60 (H)
It becomes.
In the next step S242, it is determined whether or not there is a push order instruction. In this process, the data of the push order instruction number (_NB_ORD_INF) stored in the address “F0B8” of the RWM 61 is stored in the A register. Then, when the A register value is not “0”, it is determined as “Yes” (with push order instruction), and when it is “0”, it is determined as “No” (without push order instruction).
When it is determined that there is a push order instruction, the process proceeds to step S246, and when it is determined that there is no push order instruction, the process proceeds to step S243.

  In step S243, it is determined whether or not the (winning and replay) condition device number is “0”. In this process, the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) stored in the address “F039” of the RWM 61 is stored in the A register, and it is determined whether or not the A register value is “0”. When it is determined that it is not “0” (that is, when the condition device of the game is not non-winning), the process proceeds to step S248, and when it is determined that it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S244.

If it progresses to step S244, it will be judged whether it is at the time of 1BB operation | movement. In this process, the accessory condition device number (_NB_CND_BNS) stored in the address “F040” of the RWM 61 is stored in the A register, and it is determined whether or not the A register value is “0”. When it is determined that it is “0”, it is 1BB non-operation time, and when it is determined that it is not “0”, it is 1BB operation time.
When it is determined that it is not during 1BB operation, the process proceeds to step S248, and when it is determined that it is during 1BB operation, the process proceeds to step S245.

In step S245, the symbol stop signal table 2 is set. This process is a process of setting the symbol stop signal table 2 in place of the symbol stop signal table 1 initially set in step S241. Specifically, the data stored in the A register is decremented by “1”. When the process proceeds to step S245, since the A register value is “1” at that time, the A register value becomes “0” by this decrement.
Further, the head address of the symbol stop signal table 2 is set in the HL register. This
HL register value = 2C88 (H)
It becomes.

In the next step S246, an offset value is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data stored in the A register and the data stored in the A register value are added, and the data after the addition is stored in the A register. That is, the data value of the A register is doubled.
(2) The data stored in the A register value and the data stored in the A register are added, and the data after the addition is stored in the A register. That is, the data value of the A register is doubled.
By the processes (1) and (2) above, the data value stored in the A register is quadrupled. For example, when the data in the A register before the calculation is “1”, the data is “4” after the calculation.

In step S247, address data is acquired. This process is a process of adding the value stored in the A register to the value stored in the HL register.
For example, when “2C60” is first stored in the HL register and “1” is stored in the A register, the calculation in steps S246 and S247
A register value = 4
HL register value = 2C64
It becomes.
That is, the A register value before the calculation in step S246 was “1” (push order instruction number 1). ) Can be specified.

In the next step S248, the serial communication circuit data register is set. Here, the processing of storing the address of the register for transmission in the serial communication circuit of the chip built in the main CPU 63 in the DE register is performed. In this embodiment, the address of the transmission register is “FE53”.
In step S249, a process for transmitting (outputting) the push order instruction number is executed (the push order instruction number is written in the address of the transmission register). Here, the data stored in the HL register is stored in the A register, and the data stored in the A register is stored in the address indicated by the DE register. As described above, even at this time, the HL register value is the head address of the symbol stop signal data to be transmitted.

In step S250, a process for transmitting (outputting) the designated position of the first reel 31 (the left reel 31 in this embodiment) is executed (the designated position of the left reel 31 is written in the address of the register for transmission). ). In this process, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value indicated by the HL register is stored in the A register, and the data stored in the A register is stored in the address indicated by the DE register.
Next, in step S251, processing for transmitting (outputting) the designated position of the second reel 31 (in this embodiment, the middle reel 31) is executed (the designated position of the middle reel 31 is written in the address of the transmission register). ). In this process, a value obtained by adding “2” to the value indicated by the HL register is stored in the A register, and the data stored in the A register is stored in the address indicated by the DE register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S252, where a process for transmitting (outputting) the designated position of the third reel 31 (right reel 31 in this embodiment) is executed (the designated position of the right reel 31 is written to the address of the register for transmission). ). In this process, a value obtained by adding “3” to the value indicated by the HL register is stored in the A register, and the data stored in the A register is stored in the address indicated by the DE register.
And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.
For example, when the symbol stop signal corresponding to “small aim” in FIG. 56 is transmitted by the above processing, “00H” is transmitted in step S249, “03H” is transmitted in step S250, and “03H” is transmitted in step S251. “0CH” is transmitted, and “08H” is transmitted in step S252.

The process of FIG. 55 is the process of step S56 in FIG. 41, which is the main process. When the slot machine 10 and the testing machine are electrically connected, a game / design stop signal is transmitted by the process of FIG.
On the other hand, even when the slot machine 10 and the testing machine are not connected, for example, when the slot machine 10 is installed in the hall, the process of step S56 in FIG. 41 is executed for each game. Thus, the process itself of FIG. 55 is executed. However, since the slot machine 10 and the testing machine are not connected, the symbol stop signal is not transmitted to the outside.

  Note that, as shown in steps S603 and S619 in FIG. 64, which will be described later, in this embodiment, detection of power interruption is executed during interrupt processing. For this reason, in the symbol stop signal setting process executed while interruption is prohibited, the power is not cut off during that time. In other words, even when the power is turned off during the symbol stop signal setting process (when the power-off detection signal is input (the D0 bit of the input port 2 is “1”)). The symbol stop signal setting process is executed to the end.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the reel rotation start preparation process (M_REEL_READY) in step S60 in FIG.
In step S531, it is determined whether or not the minimum game period has elapsed. In this embodiment, the minimum game time (the minimum time from the start of rotation of the reel 31 to the start of rotation of the reel 31 in the next game) is set to about 4.1 seconds. Here, the value of the minimum game time (_TM2_GAME) stored in the address “F03A” of the RWM 61 is read, stored in the A register, and whether or not the value stored in the A register is “0” (the zero flag is “1”). Or not). When it is not “0” (zero flag is not “1”), it is determined as “No”.

  If it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S532, and the minimum game time is stored. In this process, “1836” (1836 × 2.235 ms = about 4100 ms) is stored in the minimum game time (_TM2_GAME) of the RWM 61. When the minimum game interval is stored in the RWM 61 in step S532, “1” is subtracted by “1” in step S605 described later from the next interruption process. When the “1836” interrupt is executed from the time of step S532 and the value of the minimum time becomes “0”, it remains “0” thereafter. Then, in step S532 of the next game, “1836” is stored again.

In the next step S533, the condition device number is acquired. In this process, the information of the accessory condition device number (_NB_CND_BNS) of the address “F049” is stored in the H register, and the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) information of the address “F048” is stored in the L register. is there.
In the conditional device information output bit set in the next step S534, the D7 bit of the H register is set to “1” and the D6 bit of the L register is set to “1”.
In the present embodiment, when the D7 bit is “1” in the upper 2 bits of the condition device information, it indicates the accessory condition device information, and when the D6 bit is “1”, winning and replaying are performed. It is set to indicate conditional device information (see FIG. 16).

In step S535, the condition device information is stored. In this process, the H register value is stored in the accessory condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B) at the address “F04D”, and the L register value is stored in the winning and replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_N) at the address “F04C”. is there.
In step S536, the condition device information output time is stored. This process is a process of storing “25” in the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) of the address “F030” of the RWM 61. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period of “24 × 2.235 ms = 53.64 ms”, the accessory condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B) and the winning and replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_N) are output to the outside. The condition device output time set here is subtracted by “1” from the next interruption process in step S605 described later.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the medal payout number update process in step S68 of FIG.
First, in step S591, medal payout number data is acquired. Since the winning combination (combination of symbols) can be specified based on the display determination in step S66 of FIG. 41, the medal payout number corresponding to the combination of symbols is read from the data table or the like.

  In the next step S592, medal payout number data is stored. This process is a process of storing (storing) the medal payout number data acquired in step S591 in “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06C” in the RWM 61. Since the value of “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” is “0” at the time of processing in step S592, processing for newly writing data is executed. For example, when a single winning combination is won, the data value is updated from “0” to “1”. Whether or not to perform the process of step S591 is optional when a winning combination with a medal payout is not won. For example, there are a method of skipping step S591 and a method of executing the process of step S591 and writing a data value “0”.

In the next step S593, the medal payout number data buffer is saved. This processing is processing for storing (storing) the medal payout number data acquired in step S591 in “_BF_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06D” in the RWM 61. As the value of “_BF_PAY_MEDAL”, since the value written in the previous game remains, a process of writing (overwriting) the number of medals paid out in the game (“0” when there is no medal payout) is executed.
And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

  In the medal payout number update process in FIG. 59 described above, the value of “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” stored in step S592 is decremented by “1” every time one medal payout is performed, and becomes “0” at the end of medal payout. Become. On the other hand, the value of “_BF_PAY_MEDAL” stored in step S593 is maintained (not changed) until it is updated in the next game, that is, until the process of step S593 is performed in the next game.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in step S72 of FIG.
First, in step S451, an output request at the start of medal payout is set. This process is a process of storing a command indicating the acquired (paid out) number of sheets in a predetermined register. In the next step S452, control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) is executed. This process is a process of storing a command in the command buffer of the RWM 61.
In step S453, a medal number setting process is executed. This process is divided into the following two. As the first processing, the value of medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is stored in the D register. Second, the value of medal bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) is stored in the E register. In the next step S454, the operation flag is checked. This process is a process for determining on / off of each bit of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION).

Next, it progresses to step S455 and it is judged whether it is at the time of 1BB operation | movement. In the present embodiment, the 1BB operation state flag is determined based on whether or not the D3 bit of the operation state flag is “1”. When it is determined that the 1BB operation state flag is “1”, the process proceeds to step S456, and when it is determined that the 1BB operation state flag is not “1”, the process proceeds to step S460.
In step S456, the number-of-acquisable number data at the time of 1BB operation (during 1BB game) is acquired. This process is a process of storing the number of acquirable sheets (_CT_BIG_PAY) in the A register when the RWM 61 operates 1BB. Then, in the next step S457, it is determined whether or not the acquired number upper limit value at the time of 1BB operation has been reached. Here, the information in the D register (medal payout number data) is subtracted from the value stored in the A register, the calculation result is stored in the A register, and the value stored in the A register is not negative (carry flag ≠ “1” )). When it is determined that it is not negative, it is determined as “No”.
If it is determined to be negative, the process proceeds to step S458, and if not negative, the process proceeds to step S459.

In step S458, the acquirable number at the time of 1BB operation is cleared. This process is a process of performing an “XOR” operation on the A register value and the A register value and storing the operation result in the A register. By this arithmetic processing, the value of the A register is always “0”. Then, the process proceeds to step S459.
In step S459, the acquirable number at the time of 1BB operation is updated. Specifically, the A register value is stored in the acquirable number (_CT_BIG_PAY) when the RWM 61 operates 1BB. Then, the process proceeds to step S460.

In step S460, a medal payout number setting process is performed. This process is a process for storing the E register value (the E register value is medal bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) in the process of step S453) in the A register. Thereby, the value of the medal bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) is stored in the A register.
In the next step S461, it is determined whether or not replay is displayed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) is “1”. If it is determined that the replay display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S467. If it is determined that the replay display is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S462.

In step S462, a medal payout number setting process is performed. This process is a process of storing the D register value (D register value is medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) by the process of step S453) in the A register. Thus, the value of medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is stored in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to step S467.
By the above processing, when the replay is won, the A register value becomes the medal bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) value set in step S453. The medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) value set in step S462.

In step S467, it is determined whether or not a medal has been paid out. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is “0”. In this process, the value of the address “F06C” of the RWM 61 may be read and zero check may be performed. However, at the time of step S467, the medal payout number data is stored in the D register in step S453. Therefore, it is possible to read the D register value and perform zero check. When it is determined that it is “0”, that is, when it is determined that no medal has been paid out, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not “0”, that is, when it is determined that a medal has been paid out, the process proceeds to step S468.
In step S468, the number of stored sheets is read. Next, the process proceeds to step S469, and it is determined whether or not the medal storage number is a limit value. When the stored number is “50”, it is determined that the stored number is the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S473. When it is determined that the stored number is not the limit, the process proceeds to step S470.

  In step S470, the standby time for adding the stored medals is set. In this embodiment, in order to set about 100 ms as the wait time, the count value “46” (46 × 2.235 ms = about 100 ms) of the number of interrupts is set. For this reason, “00000000B” is set as the B register value, and “00101110B” is set as the C register value. In step S146, a 2-byte time wait process (R_2BYTE_WAIT) is executed. This process is a process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt and waiting until it becomes “0”. When the 2-byte time waiting process in step S471 ends, the process proceeds to step S472, and a process of adding one stored number is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S474.

  When the process proceeds from step S469 to step S473, a single medal payout process (a process of paying out an actual medal from the hopper 35a to the player) is executed. By the above process, the number of stored sheets is added until the stored number reaches the limit value, and when the stored number is the limit, a process of paying out an actual medal from the hopper is executed.

In step S474, the display of the acquisition number display LED 72 is set to “+1”. This process is a process of updating the acquired number data of the address “F00E” by “+1”. For example, when the display so far is “2”, this corresponds to a process of updating the display to “3”.
In the next step S475, a process of subtracting “1” from the medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is performed. In step S475, only the medal payout number data at the address “F06C” is updated, and the value of the medal payout number data buffer at the address “F06D” is not updated.
Next, proceeding to step S476, it is determined whether or not the medal payout has been completed. This process determines whether or not the updated medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is “0”. When it is determined that the medal payout number is “0”, the process proceeds to step S477, and when it is determined that the medal payout number is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S468.

  In step S477, an output request at the end of medal payout is set. This process is a process of storing a command indicating the end of medal payout in a register. In the next step S478, control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) is executed. This process is a process of storing a command in the command buffer of the RWM 61. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

In the payout process described above, when paying out by adding one stored number, a waiting time of about 100 ms is set by the processes in steps S471 and S472. Thereby, it can show to a player so that storage number display LED71 may count up. For example, when the display of the storage number display LED 71 before storage addition is “08” and 8 medals are stored and added to this, “display“ 08 ”→ 100 ms wait processing → display“ 09 ”→ 100 ms Wait process →... → 100 ms wait process → display “16”. On the other hand, if the standby time is not provided when adding one stored number, the display “08” is instantaneously changed to “16”.
Then, as in the present embodiment, when adding the number of stored sheets, a payout sound ("Plululu ...") output from the sub-control board 80 side is executed by executing a 2-byte waiting process for each addition. ) And counting up the number of stored sheets can be synchronized.

On the other hand, when the stored number exceeds the maximum number “50” and the medals are actually paid out in the processing after step S473, the 2-byte time waiting processing of steps S470 and S471 is not provided.
This is because, in order to pay out one actual medal, the hopper motor 36 is driven and paid out, so that it takes about 100 ms to pay out one piece as described above. As a result, the payout time per medal is about 100 ms, so when waiting for an actual medal, a 2-byte time waiting process is not provided. Therefore, when actually paying out medals, it is possible to synchronize with the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side without providing a 2-byte time waiting process.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S73 of FIG.
In step S541, processing for clearing the flag of the condition device is performed. This process is a process for clearing items other than the special role condition device. When it is determined that the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role has stopped on the effective line, the special role condition device is also cleared. In the next step S542, the replay display LED is turned off. This process corresponds to a process of setting the D3 bit of the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) to “0”. In step S543, the replay operation flag is cleared. This process is a process of setting the D0 bit of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) to “0”.

In the next step S544, 1BB operation management (M_BB_CTL; FIG. 62) is performed. As will be described later, this process is a process of determining whether or not the end condition of the 1BB game is satisfied during the 1BB game. In the next step S545, it is determined whether or not the RB is operating. This process determines whether or not the RB operation state flag which is the D4 bit of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is “0”, and when it is determined that it is not “0” (zero flag ≠ 1) (when the RB is operating) RB operation management (M_RB_CTL; FIG. 63) is performed, and when it is determined that the value is “0” (not during RB operation), the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In FIG. 41, the 2-byte waiting process at the time of displaying the special combination is executed in steps S70 and 71. However, the process is not limited to this, and can be executed before step S541 in the game end check process. .

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing 1BB operation management (M_BB_CTL) in step S544 of FIG.
In step S551, the operating state flag is checked. This process executes a process of storing the value of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) in the A register. Further, the value stored in the A register is rotated to the right (one digit). Specifically, for example, during replay operation, the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION)
A register value = 00000001B
It becomes.
If you rotate one digit to the right,
A register value = 00000000B (carry flag on)
It becomes.

For example, at the time of 1BB operation (and at the time of RB operation), the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is
A register value = 00011000B
It becomes.
If you rotate one digit to the right,
A register value = 000001100B (zero flag off (≠ “1”))
It becomes.
In the next step S552, it is determined whether or not 1BB is operating. In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the zero flag after rotation is “0”. When the zero flag is “0”, it is determined “No” (not during 1BB operation).

If it is determined in step S552 that the operation is 1BB, the process proceeds to step S553. If it is determined that the operation is not 1BB, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S553, the number of acquired sheets at the time of 1BB operation is acquired. In this process, the value of the acquirable number (_CT_BIG_PAY) at the time of 1BB operation stored in the RWM 61 (addresses “F060” and “F061”) is stored in the A register.

  In the next step S554, it is determined whether or not the 1BB operation end condition is satisfied (whether or not the acquirable number is “0”). This process is performed by determining whether or not the value stored in the A register is “0” (whether or not zero flag = “0”). When it is determined that the 1BB operation end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S555, and when it is determined that the 1BB operation end condition is not satisfied, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

  In step S555, the A register value is stored in the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION). When the process proceeds to step S555, the A register value is “0”, so the updated operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is “00000000B”. Next, proceeding to step S556, an output request at the end of 1BB operation is set. In this embodiment, “3F01” is stored in the DE register. Then, in the next step S557, the control command set 1 is executed, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing RB operation management (M_RB_CTL) in step S546 of FIG.
In step S561, “1” is subtracted from the number of games (_CT_BONUS_PLAY) during RB operation stored in the RWM 61 (address “F073”). In the next step S562, it is determined whether or not the number of games at the time of the RB operation updated in step S561 is “0” (whether or not zero flag = “1”). When it is determined that the number of games at the time of RB operation is “0”, the process proceeds to step S566, and when it is determined that it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S563.

  In step S563, it is determined whether or not the value of the medal payout number data buffer (“_BF_PAY_MEDAL” of address “F06D”) is “0”. This determination is a process for determining whether or not to subtract the value of the number of winnings at the time of RB operation, and it is determined whether or not there has been a payout due to winning a small role in the game. That is, when a small role is won in the game (has a medal payout), the medal payout number is stored in “_BF_PAY_MEDAL” in step S593 in FIG. 59 (medal payout number update process) described above. By determining whether or not the data value is “0”, it is determined whether or not there is a payout for winning a small role in the game.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the small role has won without requiring a special (dedicated) process for determining whether or not the small role has won at the time of RB operation. . That is, when the small combination wins, the “payout number storage” process based on the winning is performed. Therefore, if the payout number is read and the payout number is a specific value (“0” in this embodiment), the small combination is It is determined that no winning is made, and if the value is other than the specific value (a value other than “0” in the present embodiment), it can be determined that the small role has won.

  More specifically, in this embodiment, when medals are paid out in the game (when winning a small role), the number is stored in the above-mentioned medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL), but medal payout number data Also in the buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL), the payout number of the game is stored. The value of the medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is subtracted as the medal payout is performed, and becomes “0” at the end of the medal payout. On the other hand, the value of the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) is not updated (subtracted) by the payout process. For this reason, the determination of whether or not there has been a payout due to winning a small role in the game refers to the value of the medal payout number data buffer.

When it is determined in step S563 that the value of the medal payout number data buffer is “0” (when the small role is not won), the processing according to this flowchart ends, and when it is determined that the value is not “0”. In the case of a small role winning, the process proceeds to step S564.
In step S564, “1” is subtracted from the number of winnings (_CT_BONUS_WIN) during RB operation stored in the RWM 61 (address “F074”). Next, the process proceeds to step S565, and it is determined whether or not the operation of the RB has ended. In step S565, it is determined whether or not the value obtained by subtracting “1” from the number of winnings in step S564 is “0” (zero flag = “1”). When it is determined that it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S 566, and when it is determined that it is not “0”, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S566, the RB operation state flag is set to “0”. This process is a process of updating the D4 bit of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) to “0”.
Next, it progresses to step S567 and the standby time at the time of completion | finish of RB operation | movement is set. This process is a process for setting a value corresponding to the standby time in the BC register. In this embodiment, “5” (about 11 ms) is set in the BC register. More specifically, B register value = "0" (00000000B) and C register value = "5" (00000101B) are set. In step 5680, a 2-byte time waiting process is executed. After the 2-byte time waiting process, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

  If the operation state flag (D4 bit of _FL_ACTION) corresponding to RB is cleared (set to “0”) in step S566, the process returns to step S74 in FIG. 41 after executing the 2-byte time waiting process. And if it progresses to step S40 again, it will progress to the game start set process of step S42. In the game start set process, the D4 bit (RB) of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is set to “1” by the operation state flag update in step S88 of FIG. As a result, the RB operation state flag becomes “0” when the number of games or winnings during the RB operation is “2” and the RB operation end condition is satisfied, but does not satisfy the end condition of the 1BB game. Time (when the D3 bit (1BB) of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is “1”), after the “5” interrupt has elapsed, it is set to “1” again. By providing such processing, even if the operation state flag corresponding to RB is cleared in step S566, the operation state flag corresponding to RB can be immediately turned on while the 1BB game is continued. The reason why the RB operation state flag is once set to “0” will be described later.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 60 (main CPU 63). As described above, the main control board 60 performs the interrupt process shown in FIG. 64 at a period of 2.235 ms in parallel with the main process of FIG.
First, when the process proceeds to the interrupt process in step S601, in step S602, as an initial process, a register value saving process and a duplicate interrupt prohibition process are performed. Here, since the register of the main CPU 63 used in the main process is used in the interrupt process, the current register value is saved in the stack area of the RWM 61. Further, the interrupt prohibition flag is turned on so that the next interrupt process is not started during the interrupt process. This is because, for example, an interrupt process execution request may be made during the power-off process.

In the next step S603, it is determined whether or not power-off is detected. Here, when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less by a voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) provided on the main control board 60 (not shown), the D0 bit of the input port 2 in FIG. Since the disconnection detection signal is input, it is detected whether or not the signal is input.
Then, when power-off is detected, the process proceeds to power-off processing (IS_POWER_DOWN) in step S619, and when it is determined that power-off is not detected, the process proceeds to step S604.

In step S604, the interrupt counter value is updated.
In the next step S605, timer measurement is performed. This process is a process of subtracting the time set in the main process. Specifically, the minimum game time (_TM2_GAME) subtracted in step S532, the conditional device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) subtracted in step S536, and the minimum game time (4 in step S531). .1 second) or not.
Next, it progresses to step S606 and LED display control (I_LED_OUT; FIG. 65) is performed. Here, according to the state of the slot machine 10, the set value, the stored number, the acquired number, the error display content (error code), etc. are turned on using the 7-segment LED (digits 1 to 5).

  As described above, in the non-recoverable error shown in FIG. 41 or the like, an error display is output by the main process, but the setting value, the stored number, the acquired number, and the recoverable error display during setting change or setting confirmation are as follows: This LED display control is performed every time interrupt processing is performed.

  In step S607, the input ports 0 to 2 are read. As a result, whether or not the operation of the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, etc. has been performed, the switch signals and the input signals of various sensors are read, and data (level data, rising edge) based on the input ports 0 to 2 are read. Data, falling data) is generated and stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 61. In the next step S608, a built-in random number check process is performed. In the present embodiment, a flag that is turned on when an error occurs in the internal random number is provided, and it is determined whether or not this flag is on.

  Specifically, for example, when an abnormality in the clock frequency of the random numbers for the lottery (for example, when the random number update is late), the error flag is turned on. More specifically, it is assumed that SCLK (oscillation source: 12 MHz) and RCK (oscillation source: 9 MHz) input to the MPU are provided, and the built-in random number is updated based on RCK. At this time, the error flag is turned on when “RCK <SCLK / 2” is satisfied.

  In step S609, it is determined whether an error has occurred in the built-in random number (whether the error flag is on). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S610. If it is determined that the error has occurred, the process advances to step S620 to shift to an unrecoverable error process. The error display content at this time is “E7”.

  In step S610, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed in units of 31 reels (left, middle, and right), and includes stop, constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, deceleration start, and standby according to the operation state. When the drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the process proceeds to step S611 to perform port output processing. In this process, the excitation output of the motor 32 (for reel) and the hopper motor 36 and the excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S612, an input error check process is executed. This process is a process for determining whether or not various sensors are abnormal.
In the next step S613, control command transmission (I_CMD_OUT; FIG. 67) is performed. This process is a process of transmitting, for example, a control command set in the output request set and control command set 1 (an untransmitted control command stored in the command buffer of the RWM 61) to the sub-control board 80.
Specifically, when a control command is set in the command buffer in the output request set and control command set 1, interrupt processing after that point (in principle, if the command buffer is empty, it will come next to that point. In step S613, a control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

  In the next step S614, the data for the external signal stored in the RWM 61 is stored in the register. In the next step S615, data is written (set) to the output port 5 to output an external signal (transmission of a signal to the external concentrated terminal board 100).

In the next step S616, a test signal and condition device information output process (FIG. 69) is performed. This process is a test for determining whether the slot machine 10 is properly designed according to the law by writing (setting) data to the output ports 9 and 10 based on the data stored in the RWM 61. This is a process of transmitting a test signal to the machine.
In step S617, random number update processing is performed. In the next step S618, the register value saved in step S602 is restored, and the next interrupt is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of interrupt processing is restored and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

As shown in the above processing, lighting / extinguishing of the storage number display LED 71, the acquisition number display LED 72, the status display LEDs 73 (73a to 73g), and the set value display LED 64 is controlled by interruption processing every 2.235 ms.
Furthermore, when an untransmitted control command is stored in the command buffer for each interrupt process, the transmission process is performed.

Note that interrupt processing is not performed during non-recoverable error processing.
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that cannot occur normally, and executes processing based on abnormal data (data update of the RWM 61 based on data from the input port, transmission of a control command to the sub-control board 80), etc. To prevent it from happening, interrupts themselves are prohibited.

In other words, at the time of an unrecoverable error, the control command set 1 is not transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub control board 80, so it is meaningless to execute the control command set 1.
Furthermore, if an untransmitted command is stored in the control command buffer when an unrecoverable error occurs, the command is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. This is because the control command stored in the buffer may be incorrect.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S606 of FIG.
First, in step S621, the output ports 3 and 4 are turned off. The output port 3 is an output port corresponding to the LED digit signal, and the output port 4 is an output port corresponding to the LED segment signal. By outputting “00000000B” for these output ports 3 and 4, all LEDs are temporarily not output. Thereby, when switching the display of the LEDs, it is possible to prevent the different LEDs from being turned on and viewed at the same time (to be displayed) (afterimage prevention).

In the next step S622, the LED display request counter (_CT_SEG_DSP) (address “F00F”) is updated. The update of the LED display request counter is a process of shifting a bit that is on, that is, “1” to the right by one digit. The updated value is stored in the address “F00F” of the RWM 61. Then, the process proceeds to step S623.
In step S623, it is determined whether the LED display request counter is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the LED display request counter updated in step S622 is “0”. When it is determined that it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S624, and when it is determined that it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S625.

  In step S624, the LED display request counter is initialized. Here, the initialization of the LED display request counter is set to “00010000B” and stored in the address “F00F” of the RWM 61. Then, the process proceeds to step S625. Therefore, when the LED display request counter is updated from “00000001B” to “00000000B” in step S622, it is determined to be “0” in step S623, and thus is updated to “00010000B” in step S624. . That is, it is updated from “00000001B” to “00100000B” within one interrupt process.

In step S625, an LED display request counter and an LED display request flag are acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address “F00F” of the LED display request counter is stored in the HL register, and the value stored in the HL register is stored in the E register.
(2) “1” is added to the value of the HL register, and the data (that is, the LED display request flag) stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (F010) after the addition of “1” is stored in the A register.
(3) “1” is added to the value of the HL register. By this processing, the HL register value becomes “F011”, which is an address value indicating the error display data of the RWM 61.

In step S626, a digit segment display confirmation set for the current display is performed. In this process, the data stored in the A register (LED display request flag data) and the data stored in the E register (LED display request counter data) are ANDed, and the calculation result is stored in the A register. . Thereby, it becomes the data of LED which lights this time.
For example,
LED display request counter value: 00001000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00001000B
It becomes.
Or, for example,
LED display request counter value: 00010000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00000000B
It becomes.

Then, the data stored in the A register is stored in the D register.
In the next step S627, it is determined whether or not there is a display request. In the calculation of step S626, it is determined whether or not the A register value is “0”. When it is not “0”, it is determined that there is a display request (Yes), and when it is “0”, there is no display request (No). Judge. If “Yes” in the step S627, the process proceeds to a step S628, and if “No”, the process proceeds to the step S643.

In step S628, error display data is acquired. As described above, since the value indicated by the HL register value is the address value (F011) indicating the error display data at this time, the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the B register. .
In the next step S629, the LED segment table 2 is set. The LED segment table 2 is the data table shown in FIG. 6, and the head address of the data stored in the ROM 62 is “1816 (H)” as shown in FIG. Therefore, this address value is stored in the HL register.

  In step S630, set value data is acquired. Here, the current set value stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 61 is read and stored in the A register. In step S631, it is determined whether there is a setting value display request. This determination is made as to whether the D4 bit (digit 5) is “1” (“00010000B”) as a result of the AND operation. When it is “1”, that is, when it is determined that there is a set value display request, the process proceeds to step S642, and when it is determined that there is no set value display request, the process proceeds to step S632.

In step S632, the stored number display data stored in the address “F00D” of the RWM 61 is acquired and stored in the A register. In the next step S633, an upper digit offset is acquired. In this process, an operation of dividing the data stored in the A register by “10 (decimal number)” is executed, the quotient value is stored in the A register, and the remainder value is stored in the C register.
In the next step S634, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the upper digit of the stored number. This process determines whether or not the D0 bit of the D register (the value obtained by ANDing the LED display request counter value and the LED display request flag value) is “1”. " When it is determined that there is a display request for the upper digits of the stored number, the process proceeds to step S642, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S635.

In step S635, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the lower digit of the acquired number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the D register is “1”. If it is “1”, it is determined to be “Yes”, and the process proceeds to step S641. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no display request for the lower digit of the acquired number, the process proceeds to step S636.
In step S636, acquired number data or push order instruction data is acquired. This process is a process of storing the acquired number data (or push order instruction data) stored in the address “F00E” in the A register. In FIG. 41, the pressing order instruction data is stored in “F00E” at the timing of step S53, and the acquired number data is stored at the timing of step S72.

  In the next step S637, it is determined whether or not the error display is applicable. This process determines whether or not the B register value is “0”, and determines “No” when it is “0”. If it is determined in step S637 that the error is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S639. If it is determined that the error is displayed, the process proceeds to step S638.

In step S638, the LED segment table 1 (see FIG. 6) is set. In this process, “1811 (H)” (FIG. 7), which is the head address of the LED segment table 1, is stored in the HL register.
Next, proceeding to step S639, an upper digit offset is obtained. In this process, an operation for dividing the data stored in the A register by “10 (decimal number)” is executed, the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the maximum payout number in one game is “9”, so the number of acquired medals is not “10” or more. However, for example, when the maximum payout number is “15”, when an operation of dividing by “10” is executed, the quotient is “1” and the remainder is “5”, so “1” is stored in the A register. Then, “5” is stored in the C register.
Furthermore, when the push order instruction data is “102 (decimal number)” at the address “F00E”, when the operation divided by “10” is executed, the quotient is “10 (decimal number)” and the remainder is “2”. Therefore, “0AH” is stored in the A register, and “2H” is stored in the C register.

  In the next step S640, it is determined whether or not there is a request for displaying the upper digits of the acquired number display LED 72. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit of the D register is “1”. If it is “1”, it is determined that there is a display request. When it is determined that there is a display request, the process proceeds to step S642, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S641.

In step S641, an offset for the lower digit is acquired. This process is a process for storing the data stored in the C register in the A register.
In step S642, segment output data is acquired. In this process, the data stored in the HL register and the data stored in the A register are added, and the address data on the ROM 62 indicated by the added data is stored in the D register.
For example,
HL register value = 1816 (H) (before addition)
A register value = 1 (H)
HL register value = 1817 (H) (after addition)
D register value = 00000110 (B): Data for displaying “1”.

Note that when push order instruction data is stored in the acquired number data of “F00E”,
HL register value = 1816 (H) (before addition)
A register value = 0A (H)
HL register value = 1820 (H) (after addition)
D register value = 01001000 (B): Data for displaying “=”.

Next, proceeding to step S643, it is determined whether there is a request to display segment P. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data stored in the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) of the address “F012” of the RWM 61 is stored in the A register.
(2) An AND operation is performed on the data stored in the A register and the data stored in the E register. When the calculation result is “0”, it is determined that there is no display request. When it is determined that there is a segment P display request, the process proceeds to step S644, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S645.

  In step S644, segment P output data is set. This process is a process of setting the D7 bit (bit corresponding to the segment P) of the data stored in the D register to “1”. In step S645, LED display data is output. Specifically, the data stored in the E register is stored in the output port 3, and the data stored in the D register is stored in the output port 4. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

  As described above, in this embodiment, one digit is turned on by one interrupt process. That is, for each interrupt (every 2.235 ms), the LED to be lit is switched in the order of digit 5 → digit 4 →... → digit 1 → digit 5 →. Therefore, for example, after the upper digit of the storage number display LED 71 which is the digit 1 is turned on, it is turned on after “11.175 ms” after 5 interrupts.

Here, the luminance of the LED is determined by the time interval of ms from the lighting time to the next lighting time. In the present embodiment, as described above, one digit is controlled to be lit once every "11.175 ms". From the viewpoint of the player (human), the digits 1 to 4 are almost Since it seems to be always on, there is no problem.
On the other hand, in the case of an unrecoverable error, for example, a process of repeatedly switching the lighting of the upper digit and the lower digit every 0.128 ms is executed. Thereby, the switching cycle of the lighting LED at the time of the unrecoverable error is earlier than the interruption cycle, and the luminance is higher than the LED lighting luminance in the interruption processing.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the power-off processing (IS_POWER_DOWN) when the power-off is detected in FIG. 64 and the process proceeds to step S619.
First, in step S651, all the output ports are turned off. Next, proceeding to step S652, the power-off process completion flag is stored in the RWM 61. This process is a process of storing in the RWM 61 data indicating that a normal power-off process has been executed. Specifically, “01 (H)” is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 61. As a result, when normal power-off processing is performed, “01 (H)” is stored as a power-off processing completed flag via step S652, but in the case of other power-off processing, the power-off processing completed flag is stored. As a result, “01 (H)” is not stored in the address.

In the next step S653, checksum data of the RWM 61 is calculated. This process calculates a checksum including a work area (RWM 61) used in the program. Examples of the program use area to be processed include a program work area, an unused area, and a stack area.
In the next step S654, it is determined whether or not the calculation of the entire range of the checksum has been completed. If it is determined that the calculation has not been completed, the process returns to step S653 and the calculation of the checksum is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the checksum calculation has been completed, the process proceeds to step S655.

  In step S655, the calculated checksum is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 61. Here, the data stored in the RWM 61 is 1-byte data (also referred to as complement data) that becomes “0” when all data in the program use area and the value stored in the predetermined address are added during the checksum of the RWM 61. ). Specifically, all data in the program usage area (program work area, unused area, stack area, etc.) of the target RWM 61 is added, and the value of the lower 8 bits at that time is, for example, “00000001” (01H) If there is, the checksum data stored at the predetermined address is “11111111” (FFH).

  When the checksum of the RWM 61 is executed at the start of the program, all the data in the program use area of the RWM 61 in the same range as above and the checksum data are added. If the checksum data calculated thereby is “0”, it is determined as a normal value, and if it is not “0”, it is determined as an abnormal value.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S656 to enter a reset wait state. Here, when the voltage reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) provided on the main control board 60, so that the output of the reset signal is awaited. Here, when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, the voltage monitoring device inputs a power-off detection signal to the D0 bit of the input port 2 (FIG. 8), and then a predetermined time elapses by a circuit composed of a capacitor and a resistor. After that, the reset signal is input to the MPU. At this time, the capacitor and the resistance value are designed so that the processing time when the power is cut off is normally executed.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing control command transmission in step S613 of FIG.
First, in step S661, the address of the control command buffer is set. This process is a process of storing “F113 (H)” which is the start address of the control command buffer (_BF_SUBCMD) in the HL register.
In the next step S662, the read pointer value of the control command is acquired. This process is a process of storing the control command read pointer value of the address “F017” in the RWM 61 in the A register.

The “designated address set” in the next step S663 is a process of adding the data stored in the HL register and the data stored in the A register and storing the added data in the HL register.
Further, in “address setting of control command buffer to be transmitted” in step S664, as in step S663, the data stored in the HL register and the data stored in the A register are added, and after the addition This is a process of storing data in the HL register.
Through the processes in steps S663 and S664 described above, data obtained by doubling the data stored in the A register is added to the data stored in the HL register.

In the next step S665, it is determined whether or not a control command is included. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the E register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding “1” to the HL register value is stored in the D register.
(3) When the data stored in the E register and the data stored in the D register are “0”, it is determined that there is no control command (No).
If it is determined that the control command is included, the process proceeds to step S666. If it is determined that the control command is not included, the process proceeds to step S670.

In step S666, a control command is output. In this process, the data stored in the E register is output to the output port 7, and the data stored in the D register is output to the output port 8.
In the next step S667, output from the output port 2 is performed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The value of the number-of-inserts display LED signal data (_PT_MEDAL_LED) at address “F01D” is stored in the A register.
(2) OR the data stored in the A register and “10000000B”, and store the operation result in the A register.
(3) The data stored in the A register is output to the output port 2.
As a result, the D7 bit (sub control data strobe signal) of the data output to the output port 2 is always “1”.

In the next step S668, the transmitted command storage buffer is cleared. In this process, the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and the data stored at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding “1” to the HL register value are cleared (set to “0”).
In step S669, the control command read pointer value is updated. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address of the control command read pointer value (_NB_CMDREAD) at the address “F017” is stored in the HL register.
(2) Add “1” to the HL register value.
(3) It is determined whether or not the HL register value after addition exceeds “31” (decimal number), and if it does not exceed “31”, that value is stored in the control command read pointer value. On the other hand, when “31” is exceeded, “0” is stored in the control command read pointer value.

In the next step S670, output from the output port 2 is performed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The value of the number-of-inserts display LED signal data (_PT_MEDAL_LED) at address “F01D” is stored in the A register.
(2) The data stored in the A register is output to the output port 2.
As a result, the D7 bit (sub control data strobe signal) of the data output to the output port 2 is always “0”.

Therefore, the sub control data strobe signal is “1” at the output of step S667, and the sub control data strobe signal is “0” at the output of step S670.
In step S671, control command clear data is output. This process is a process of outputting “00000000B” to the output ports 7 and 8. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 68 is a time chart showing signal transmission timings in the control command transmission process (I_CMD_OUT) in FIG.
When the interrupt process is started, in step S666 of the control command transmission process, the second control command (sub control data signals 1 to 8) is output to the output port 7 and the first control command (sub control data is output to the output port 8). Signals 9-16) are output.

When the transmission of the first control command and the second control command is started, a sub control data strobe signal is transmitted in step S667. Here, the time from the start of transmission of the first control command and the second control command to the start of transmission of the sub control data strobe signal ("A" in the figure. From step S666 to step S667). ) Is, for example, about “1.75 μS”.
Further, the time during which the sub control data strobe signal is transmitted (“B” in the figure. From step S667 to S670) is, for example, about “4.25 μS”. In the figure, “C” (between steps S670 and S671) is, for example, about “1.19 μS”.
Then, after the first control command and the second control command are transmitted in the process of step S666, the control command clear data “00H” is output to the output ports 7 and 8 by the process of step S671.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the test signal / condition device information output processing in step S616 of FIG.
In step S571, test signal output data is set. This process is a process of storing the information stored in the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) in the A register. Then, in the next step S572, a test signal is output. This process is a process for outputting the information stored in the A register to the output port 10. As a result, information based on the information stored in the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is output (transmitted) from the output port 10. Therefore, the operation state flag signal can be output to the testing machine as a test signal.

In the process of FIG. 69, steps S571 and S572 described above correspond to an operation state flag information output process, and the following steps S573 to S579 correspond to a condition device information output process.
Thus, in the present embodiment, information based on the information stored in the operating state flag is output from the output port 10. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation state flag is not provided, and predetermined information (assuming that some information indicating the operation state is stored in each address) is acquired from the addresses of the plurality of RWMs 61. Alternatively, a method of creating (combining) information corresponding to the operation state flag by arithmetic processing using a register and writing (setting) the information to the output port 10 as a test signal may be used.

In the next step S573, clear data of the conditional device information is set. This process is a process for storing the information stored in the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) stored in the RWM 61 in the A register.
As described above, in FIG. 58, if it is determined in step S531 that the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) has elapsed, in step S536, the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) has a value of “25”. Remembered. This value is decremented by “1” for each interrupt (specifically, during the timer measurement process in step S605 of FIG. 64). Therefore, after the value “25” is stored, “0” is obtained after the “25” interruption.

  In the next step S574, it is determined whether or not the condition device information is being output. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the A register is “0” (zero flag = 1). If “0”, it is determined “No”, and if it is not “0”, “Yes”. Judge. When it is determined that it is time to output the condition device information, the process proceeds to step S575, and when it is determined that it is not time to output the condition apparatus information, the process proceeds to step S579.

  In step S575, the address of the RWM 61 of the accessory condition device information is set. Specifically, the address of the accessory condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B), that is, “F04D (H)” is stored in the HL register. As a result, the H register value = “F0 (H)” and the L register value = “4D (H)”. In the next step S576, it is determined whether or not it is time to output the accessory condition device information. In this process, “12.5 (25/2)” is subtracted from the value stored in the A register (the A register stores the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) in step S573). This is a process of determining “Yes” when it is determined that the calculation result is greater than “0” (carry flag ≠ 1). That is, it is determined whether or not half of the time has elapsed from “24”, which is the initial value of the conditional device output time. When it is determined that it is time to output the accessory condition apparatus information, the process proceeds to step S578, and when it is determined that the accessory condition apparatus information is not output, the process proceeds to step S577.

  In step S577, the address of the RWM 61 of the winning and replay condition device information is set. In this process, the address of the winning and replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_N), that is, “F04C (H)” is stored in the HL register, so that “1” is subtracted from the HL register value. As a result, HL register value = “F04C (H)” (H register value = “F0 (H)” and L register value = “4C (H)”).

Next, the process proceeds to step S578, and condition device information is acquired. This process is a process for storing the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register. Therefore, when the HL register value = “F04C (H)”, the value of the winning and replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_N) is stored, and when the HL register value = “F04D (H)”, the accessory condition The value of device information (_NB_CNDINF_B) is stored.
In step S579, the information stored in the A register is output to the output port 9. As a result, the conditional device information is output (transmitted) from the output port 9. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

In the test signal / condition device information output process described above, the information on the operation state flag can be output (transmitted) to the test machine for each interrupt process. For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the operation state flag of the slot machine 10 is correctly executed by receiving the signal on the test machine side.
In step S574, if the value of the conditional device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) is “0”, it is determined “No”, and the process proceeds to step S579. In this case, since the A register value is “0”, “0” (00000000B) is output as the conditional device information.

If the value of the conditional device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) is not “0” (“1” to “24”), the conditional device information is output for each interrupt process.
As the initial value of the condition device output time, “25” is set in step S536 in FIG. 58, but after “1” is subtracted in step S605 in FIG. 64, the test signal / condition device information in step S616. Proceed to output processing. Therefore, when “25” is set in step S536 and the process proceeds to step S574 in FIG. 69 for the first time, the conditional device output time value is “24”.

  Further, in the case of outputting the condition device information, if the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) is “13” to “24” (also referred to as the first period) in the determination in step S576, step S577 is not executed. Therefore, the condition device information to be output is the accessory condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B). On the other hand, when the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) is “1” to “12” (also referred to as the second period) in the determination in step S576, the processing in step S577 is executed, so that the output condition The device information is winning and replay information device information (_NB_CNDINF_N).

Furthermore, for each interrupt process, when the value of the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) is “0”, the value of “0” as the condition device information and the value of the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) are other than “0”. Is a value other than “0” as the conditional device information.
The condition device information is updated in step S533 in FIG. Therefore, the condition device information is updated after the minimum gaming time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed (when “Yes” in step S531). As a result, when there is a change in the received condition device information other than “0”, the tester side receives the condition device information other than “0”, and then receives a change other than “0”. By measuring the time until the condition device information is received, it is possible to determine whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) is secured. Therefore, the minimum gaming time can be measured on the testing machine side by merely outputting the condition device information with the above configuration without separately providing information on the minimum gaming time.

Next, in FIG. 69, the output of the test signal (operation state flag) in step S572 and the output of the condition device information in step S579 will be described.
FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating an on / off state of the D3 bit (1BB) and the D4 bit (RB) in the information on the operation state flag output as the test signal in step S572.

In the example of FIG. 70, the game is 1BB, the D3 bit (1BB) of the operation state flag is turned on, and the D4 bit (RB) is repeatedly turned on / off.
When the 1BB game is started, the D3 (1BB) and D4 (RB) bits of the operation state flag become “1”, so that the D3 bit (1BB) and D4 bit (RB) are used as test signals by the interrupt processing. Is turned on (“1”).

  Then, after the RB operation, when it is determined that the two games are completed and the RB operation end condition is satisfied (“Yes” in step S565 of FIG. 63), the RB operation state flag is set to “0” in step S566. Then, in the next steps S567 and S568, standby processing is performed for the interrupt count “5” (about 11 ms). Thereafter, the process returns to step S74 of FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the game start set process in step S42 again. If the operation state flag update in step S88 in FIG. 42 does not satisfy the end condition of the 1BB game, the D4 bit (RB) of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is set. It is set to “1”.

As a result, in the 1BB game, when the end condition of the 1BB game is not satisfied, the RB operation state flag is “1” between the two games, so that the test signal of the RB operation is continuously output and after the end of the two games , “5” during the interrupt (about 11 ms), “0” and again “1”. Thereby, the signal waveform shown in FIG. 70 is obtained.
Here, the main process stops during steps S567 and S568 of FIG. That is, even if the operation switch is operated, the operation is not accepted. After the RB operation state flag has changed from “1” to “0”, for example, when a 2-byte waiting process for a few seconds is executed, the player cannot operate the operation switch. It can be considered that the processing is stopped (freezing).

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, if it is set between “5” interrupts (about 11 ms), even if the main process is stopped, the player feels uncomfortable (the player breaks the rhythm of the game) It is thought that there is almost no. If the main process is stopped for about 11 ms, it is considered that the player can hardly feel the stop of the main process.
On the other hand, if the time for which the RB operation state flag is “0” is too short, it is correctly confirmed that the RB operation state flag is “0” when the test signal is output to the testing machine. There is a possibility that it cannot be detected. In consideration of these points, in this embodiment, “5” is set between interrupts (about 11 ms).

As a result, the above-mentioned time can be used as a time during which the testing machine can correctly detect that the operation state flag of the RB is “0” as a test signal without causing the player to realize the stop of the main process (game progress). It was set.
In this embodiment, “5” is set between interrupts (about 11 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, between “2” interrupts (about 4.5 ms) to “25” interrupts (about 56 ms). If it exists, it is thought that the same effect as the above can be exhibited.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an output example of condition device information in step S579 of FIG.
In the example of FIG. 71, in the 1BB inside, “N” game (winning and replay) condition device number “23” (small role A1) is won, and in the next “N + 1” game (winning and replay). An example of output of condition device information when the condition device number “1” (replay A) is won is shown. In the “N” game, 1BB is not won.
First, when it is inside 1BB, the D0 bit of the accessory condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B) is “1”. Therefore, the accessory condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B) is “10000001B”.
In addition, when the condition device number “23” is won in the “N” game, the D0 to D5 bits of the winning and replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_N) are “010111” (= “23”). And the replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_N) becomes “010110111B”.

  In the “N” game, while the condition device output time value is “24” to “13”, “Yes” is obtained in step S576 of FIG. 69, and the accessory condition device information set in step S575 is output. To do. Next, while the condition device output time value is “12” to “1”, “No” is determined in step S576 of FIG. 69, and the winning and replay condition device information set in step S577 is output. Next, when the condition device output time value becomes “0”, the condition device information (“00000000B”) cleared in step S573 is output because “No” is obtained in step S574 of FIG.

  Then, the next game is started, and in the “N + 1” game, a lottery is performed, and when the condition device number “1” is won, the condition device output time values are “24” to “13”. "10000001B" is output during the period of "N", and "0100010001B" is output while the condition device output time value is between "12" and "1". Thereby, the signal waveform shown in FIG. 71 is obtained.

  Here, since the output of the “N” game accessory condition device information is started (when the condition device output time value is “24”), the “N + 1” game accessory condition device information is output. Until the start time (when the condition device output time value is “24”), when the game is consumed in the shortest time, the minimum game time is 4.1 seconds (“1836” interrupt). . Therefore, as described above, the testing machine measures the time from when the output of the accessory condition device information is started to when the output of the accessory condition device information is started in the next game. If 1 second has elapsed, it can be determined that the slot machine 10 guarantees the minimum game time.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment, in FIG. 42, the command transmission table 1 is set in step S95, and the control command continuous setting process (M_CMD_LIST; FIG. 45) is executed in the next step S96.
Similarly, in FIG. 41, the command transmission table 2 is set in step S58, and the control command continuous setting process is executed in the next step S59.
Also, the control commands transmitted continuously here are, for example, when the command transmission table 1 is set, as shown in FIG. 43, (1) operating state, (2) 1BB acquired number (lower order), (3) 1BB acquired number (high rank), (4) main game state, (5) number of precursor games / number of AT games, and (6) RT state. When the command transmission table 2 is set, as shown in FIG. 44, (1) push order instruction number, (2) production group number, and (3) accessory condition device number.
On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a process for continuously setting a plurality of commands is executed by a method other than the command transmission table set and the control command continuous set.

FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the second embodiment. In FIG. 72, (A) shows commands set continuously, and (B) and (C) show flowcharts corresponding to the second embodiment. .
As shown in FIG. 72 (A), it is assumed that there are three consecutively set commands: an accessory condition device number, an effect group number, and a push order instruction number. That is, three control commands transmitted using the command transmission table 2. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
In the second embodiment, the address of the RWM 61 of the control command that is continuously transmitted (set) is set to a serial number. In the example of FIG. 72 (A), data of an accessory condition device number, an effect group number, and a push order instruction number are stored in addresses “F0B6” to “F0B8” of the RWM 61, respectively.
Further, the first control commands of the data of the accessory condition device number, the production group number, and the push order instruction number are 39 (H), 3A (H), and 3B, respectively, as shown in FIG. Assume that (H).

  Next, as shown in (B) in the figure, instead of the command transmission table set and the control command continuous set described above, the command output request set in step S701, the control command transmission number set in step S702, and the continuous in step S703. A command set (M_CONCMDS_SET; FIG. 72 (C)) is performed.

First, in the command output request set in step S701, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data of the first control command is stored in the D register during the control command when transmitting the accessory condition device number. In this example, as shown in FIG.
D register value = 39 (H)
It becomes.
(2) The lower address of the RWM 61 in which the accessory condition device number is stored is stored in the E register in order to generate the second control command among the control commands when transmitting the accessory condition device number.
Since the address of the RWM 61 in which the accessory condition device number is stored is “F0B6” as shown in FIG. 72 (A),
E register value = B6 (H)
It becomes.

In the next step S702, the control command transmission number is set. In this example, since three commands are transmitted, the number of control command transmissions is “3”. This value is stored in the B register. Therefore,
B register value = 3 (H)
It becomes.
In the next step S703, the continuous command set (M_CONCMDS_SET) shown in FIG. 72C is executed.
First, the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) in step S711 is the same as that shown in FIG. By executing the control command set 1, the control command to be transmitted is stored in the control command buffer.

In the next step S712, an output request for the next control command is set. Here, the D register value and the E register value are each incremented by “1”. In the above example,
D register value = 3A (H)
E register value = B7 (H)
It becomes.
In step S713, it is determined whether the control command set is completed. Here, the B register value is decremented by “1”, and when the value after decrement is “0”, it is determined that the control command set is finished, and the processing according to this flowchart is finished.
On the other hand, when the value after decrement is not “0”, it is determined that the control command set is not finished, and the process returns to step S711.

As mentioned above,
D register value = 3A (H)
E register value = B7 (H)
Then, when returning to step S711, the control command for the production group number is transmitted. Next, when proceeding to step S712, the D register value and the E register value are each further incremented by "1".
D register value = 3B (H)
E register value = B8 (H)
It becomes. Thereby, the control command of the pressing order instruction number is transmitted by the control command set 1 in the subsequent step S711.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the addresses of the control commands to be transmitted are provided sequentially in the order of transmission (the RWM 61 is continuously arranged), whereby the control commands as shown in FIG. 45 (first embodiment). A continuous set is not required.
However, when the command transmission tables 1 and 2 are provided and the control command continuous setting process is provided as in the first embodiment, it is not necessary to provide the addresses of the RWM 61 in the order of transmission of the control commands. Therefore, restrictions on the address arrangement (order) of the RWM 61 are relaxed in the first embodiment. On the other hand, by configuring as in the second embodiment, the command transmission tables 1 and 2 as in the first embodiment become unnecessary.

In the second embodiment, control commands are transmitted in the order of addresses “F0B6”, “F0B7”, and “F0B8”. On the other hand, it is also possible to transmit control commands in the order of addresses “F0B8”, “F0B7”, and “F0B6”.
In this case, in the command output request set in step S701,
D register value = 3B (H)
E register value = B8 (H)
And
In step S712, the D register value and the E register value are decremented by “1”, respectively.
D register value = 3A (H)
E register value = B7 (H)
And Even if it sets in this way, it becomes the same as the above. However, the transmission order of the control commands is the push order instruction number → the production group number → the accessory condition device number.
Further, the six control commands shown in the command transmission table 1 of the first embodiment can be transmitted by the method of the second embodiment.

<Third Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, the symbol stop signal table 2 (FIG. 57) is set when 1BB is won or when the condition device in 1BB is not won.
However, not limited to this, when a specific winning and replay condition device is won in 1BB, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped on the active line in preference to the symbol combination corresponding to the selected condition device. In such a case, the symbol stop signal table 2 may be set.
For example, in the first embodiment, since the strong chance of the condition device number “50” is “PB = 1”, the strong chance stops regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42, and the 1BB winning is carried over. Even if it is, 1BB cannot be won. For this reason, in the present embodiment, when the condition device number “50” is selected, the small character aim of the symbol stop signal table 1 is transmitted as a symbol stop signal regardless of whether or not the inside of 1BB is in progress.

On the other hand, it is assumed that a chance eye with “PB ≠ 1” is provided. And when winning the chance in the inside of 1BB, in order to be able to win the winning 1BB, the symbol stop signal table 2 is set and a symbol stop signal for aiming at “black BAR” is set. You may send it.
For example, it is assumed that the symbol combination of the chance is “watermelon A / watermelon B” − “blank” − “black BAR”. As a result, the chance is “PB ≠ 1”.
And when you think which is better to stop the chance you won in the game and to win the 1BB that has won the win, you should win 1BB Conceivable. Therefore, in this case, a symbol stop signal for aiming at “black BAR” is transmitted.

Further, it is assumed that a small combination with “PB ≠ 1” and a payout number of one or two (less than three) (hereinafter referred to as “first specific small combination”) is provided. And when the 1st specified small role is won in 1BB, 1BB is won in the game rather than winning the 1st specified small role in the game and earning 1 or 2 profits. It is also possible to think that it is better to start the 1BB game.
For this reason, when the 1st specified small role is won in the inside of 1BB, the symbol stop signal table 2 is set and a symbol stop signal for aiming at “black BAR” is transmitted.

Furthermore, when a second specified small role with “PB ≠ 1” and a payout number of 3 (the same number as the number of medals inserted) is provided, the second specified small role is won in 1BB. In such a case, it is possible to consider that it is more advantageous to win the second specified small role in the game and obtain three profits. For example, when four or more small roles are won in the next game, there is a possibility that the difference number can be positive in the next game. In this case, a symbol stop signal for aiming at the small role is transmitted.
On the other hand, if it is thought that it is better to prioritize the 1BB win than the second specified small role, the game will prioritize the 1BB that has won the prize, and aim for “Black BAR”. The symbol stop signal for performing is transmitted.

  In addition, when winning a “PB ≠ 1” small role with 4 or more payouts (hereinafter referred to as a third specific small role), the person who won the third specific small role in the game The difference in the number of games will be positive. Therefore, in this case, the symbol stop signal table 1 is set, and a symbol stop signal for aiming a small role is transmitted.

As mentioned above, although one Embodiment of this invention was described, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, For example, the following various deformation | transformation are possible.
(1) The display of the acquisition number display LED 72 during non-AT (after the operation of the start switch 41) may be in a light-off state other than “00”. Alternatively, “* 0” (“*” means light extinction) may be used. When at least one digit of the acquired number display LED 72 is turned off, the LED display request flag is set to “0”, or the LED segment table is made to have the light-off state data.

(2) The upper digit display of the push order instruction information is not limited to “=”. For example, a specific alphabet character that is not used for error display, specifically “J”, “L”, or the like may be used.
Moreover, the display of the push order instruction information may be displayed with one digit. However, if it is displayed as a single-digit number, it is difficult to distinguish whether it is the pressing order instruction information or the acquired number. However, if the pressing order instruction information is displayed with only the upper digit (digit 3) (the digit 4 which is the lower digit is turned off), it can be substantially different from the display of the acquired number.

(3) It is also possible to display the condition device number itself as the display of the push order instruction information. For example, when the condition device number “25” (push order bell) is won, “25” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72.
(4) In this embodiment, “100 (decimal number)” is added to the push order instruction number in step S220 of FIG. 52 to generate push order instruction data. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the push order instruction number may be set from “101” to “109” (decimal number) from the beginning so that “100” need not be added.

(5) In this embodiment, the symbol stop signal set processing (S_IF2_SET) of FIG. 55 and the test signal / condition device information output of FIG. Normally, all the programs including these programs are stored in the program area of the ROM 62 in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a program unrelated to the game, such as a program transmitted to the testing machine, can be stored in the second program area. As a result, it is possible to give a margin to the storage capacity of the first program area in which the main process (M_MAIN) and the like in FIG. 41 are stored.
In particular, in the case of a conventional machine that manages the AT with the sub control board 80, the program related to the AT can be stored in the ROM 82 of the sub control board 80.
Further, in a slot machine that does not execute AT, for example, a slot machine such as a conventional so-called normal A type, a sufficient capacity for storing a program related to transmission of a test signal can be secured in the first program area.

However, in the case of the type in which the AT is managed on the main control board 60 side as in this embodiment, there is a possibility that there is no room in the storage capacity of the first program area. Therefore, a program relating to transmission of a test signal, which is a program unrelated to the game, can be stored in the second program area.
Furthermore, in the second program area, a program relating to error detection that is unrelated to the progress of the game is stored, so that there is room for the storage capacity of the first program.

  (6) Furthermore, the command transmission tables 1 and 2 shown in the first embodiment are originally programs for transmitting commands, but as shown in FIGS. 43 (B) and 44 (B), It is stored as data. Therefore, the command transmission tables 1 and 2 can be stored not only in the program area of the ROM 62 but also in the data area. In this way, although the program capacity is full, the command transmission table can be stored in the data area when the data capacity is surplus.

(7) In the main process of FIG. 41, interrupt inhibition is executed in step S55, which is before the symbol stop signal setting process in step S56, and interrupt is permitted in step S57 after the symbol stop signal setting process is completed. In this way, in addition to providing interrupt prohibition / permission in the main process, it is also possible to provide interrupt prohibition / permission during the symbol stop signal setting process.
Specifically, the following patterns are given as patterns other than those shown in FIGS. 41 and 55.
a) In step S55 of FIG. 41, interrupt inhibition is executed. In FIG. 55, interrupt permission is executed at the end of the symbol stop signal setting process (after step S252). Thereby, step S57 of FIG. 41 becomes unnecessary.
b) Step S55 of FIG. 41 is not executed. In FIG. 55, an interrupt prohibition process is executed before step S241. Then, after the symbol stop signal setting process ends, the process returns to the main process, and interrupt permission is executed in step S56.
c) In the main process, neither interrupt prohibition in step S55 nor interrupt permission in step S57 is executed. On the other hand, in FIG. 55, an interrupt prohibition process is executed before step S241. Further, after step S252, interrupt permission is executed. Then, the process returns to the main process.

  (8) Although the interrupt period is 2.235 ms, it is not limited to this value. For example, various times such as 1 ms may be mentioned. Then, as in this embodiment, when the digit lighting time is set to one interrupt time, the lighting time of one digit depends on the interrupt time. Further, since the 2-byte time waiting process uses an interrupt counter, the waiting time (value stored in the BC register) also varies depending on how long the interrupt cycle is set.

(9) In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of games at the time of RB operation is set to “2”, and the upper limit value of the number of times of winning at the time of RB operation is set to “2”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and according to the current rules, the upper limit value of the number of games at the time of RB operation is “12” or less, and the upper limit value of the number of times of winning at the time of RB operation is “8” or less, any setting is possible. Good.
(10) In the above embodiment, the production group number is uniformly selected and transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the start of the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selection of the production group number and the transmission to the sub-control board 80 may be performed during non-AT. On the other hand, during the AT, the selected condition device number may be transmitted directly to the sub-control board 80 without selecting the production group number. In the AT, the correct push order is notified, so even if the condition device number is transmitted directly to the sub-control board 80, there is no concern that the correct push order is known by acquiring the information illegally.
Note that, as in this embodiment, regardless of non-AT / AT, it is not necessary to make a non-AT / AT determination for each game if the production group number is always selected and transmitted to the sub-control board 80. The control processing load is reduced.

  (11) In the above embodiment, replay lottery is not performed in RT5 (1BB game), but replay lottery is also possible in RT5 (1BB game). For example, by providing a replay that can be matched to “7” or “BAR” by pressing order and pressing, and notifying that pressing order and pressing should be announced when the replay is won. Can be mentioned. Then, after showing the player the “7” or “BAR” assortment, an AT winning or AT game number of times is added.

(12) In this embodiment, since only one type of 1BB (a set of “black BAR”) is provided as a special role, only the symbol stop signal table 2 is provided, and the symbol stop signal is a game in which 1BB can win a prize. Table 2 was set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other 1BB or other special combination may be provided. In that case, a symbol stop signal table specific to the special combination is provided, and the special combination can be won. Then, the symbol stop signal table corresponding to the special combination is set.
For example, it is assumed that a special combination comprising a combination of symbols “red 7”-“red 7”-“red 7” is provided as another special combination. In this case, in a game in which the special role can be won, setting the symbol stop signal table 3 (aim for red 7) can be mentioned. The data in the symbol stop signal table 3 (red 7 aim) is
"DEFB 0, 17, 13, 7"
It becomes.

(13) In the flowchart shown in the present embodiment, the order of processing is not limited to the order shown in the figure. When the order of processing can be changed, the order of processing can be changed. .
(14) In this embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a ball game machine, an enclosed game machine, and the like.
(15) The present embodiment and the above-described various modifications are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combination.

<Appendix>
The inventions (initial inventions) described in the initial specification and the like of the present application can include, for example, the following initial inventions 1 to 11 to solve the problems to be solved by the original invention and the problems related to the original invention, respectively. The means and the effect of the initial invention are as follows. However, the initial invention is not meant to be limited to the following initial inventions 1 to 11.
The initial invention according to the claims of the present application corresponds to the following initial invention 7.

1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 1 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that manages an AT by a main control means.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a slot machine that manages AT (notification game) by a main control means (main control board) and a slot machine that manages AT by a sub control means (sub control board) are known.
Here, in the former case, it is necessary to generate a control command such as whether or not the current state is AT, and to transmit the control command to the sub-control means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-150881). .
However, in the above-described conventional technology, since the notification of the pushing order during AT is performed exclusively on the sub-control means side, there is a problem that it cannot function as a gaming machine without the sub-control means. is there.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to make it function as a gaming machine with only the main control means.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 1 (the corresponding embodiment will be described in parentheses)
The first solution is
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
A display device (acquired number display LED 72) controlled by the main control means,
A plurality of types of main game states (main game state 0 to main game state 7) controlled by the main control means;
The main control means includes
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
Storage means capable of storing the main gaming state (address “F08F” (_NB_GAM_STS) of RWM 61),
In the main control means, the main game state stored in the storage means is a specific main game state (during AT such as main game state 2 or 3), and the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined value Information (push order instruction information) of the operation mode (correct push order) of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player in the game that has become the lottery result (for example, the push order winning of the condition device numbers “23” to “40”) Is displayed on the display device.
Further, the second solving means is the first solving means,
The main control means includes
When the main game state stored in the storage means is the specific main game state and the lottery result of the lottery means is the predetermined lottery result, the player is based on the lottery result. Predetermined processing (selection of push order instruction numbers (steps S215 to S218 in FIG. 52)) for determining the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the user,
The main game state stored in the storage means is another specific main game state (non-AT such as main game state 0 or 1) different from the specific main game state, and the lottery means When the lottery result is the predetermined lottery result (“No” in step S214 in FIG. 52), the predetermined process is not executed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 1 According to the initial invention, when the main control means is in a specific main game state, information on the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is displayed, so only the main control means is displayed. Thus, it can function as a gaming machine.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 2 Same as the original invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 2 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solution is
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
A display device (acquired number display LED 72) controlled by the main control means,
The main control means includes
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
A lottery result number of the lottery means and an operation mode determination table (pressing order instruction number table) that stores information on the operation mode of the stop switch in association with each other;
In the game (main gaming state 3, AT) that displays information on the operation mode of the stop switch, the main control unit uses the lottery result number of the lottery unit as an offset value from the operation mode determination table to determine the operation mode of the stop switch. Information (push order instruction number) is acquired (steps S215 to S218 in FIG. 52), and information on the operation mode of the stop switch is displayed on the display device based on the acquired information (steps S220 and S221 in FIG. 52). Step S645 in FIG. 65)
It is characterized by that.

Further, the second solving means is the first solving means,
The display device consists of an upper digit (digit 3) and a lower digit (digit 4),
The main control means executes a predetermined calculation (a process of adding “100 (decimal number)”) to the information acquired from the operation mode determination table in a game displaying information about the operation mode of the stop switch. Thus, information to be displayed in the upper digit (“=”) and information to be displayed in the lower digit (“1” to “9”) are defined.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 2 According to the initial invention, the main control means displays information on the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player when in a specific main game state. The gaming machine can be functioned without notification of the operation mode of the stop switch.
Furthermore, acquisition and display of information on the operation mode of the stop switch can be executed with a small storage capacity.

3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 3 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that manages an AT with main control means.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a slot machine that manages AT (notification game) by a main control means (main control board) and a slot machine that manages AT by a sub control means (sub control board) are known.
Here, in the former case, it is necessary to generate a control command such as whether or not the current state is AT, and to transmit the control command to the sub-control means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-150881). .
However, since the storage capacity of the main control unit is limited in the above-described conventional technology, efficient information processing is required when a control command is transmitted from the main control unit to the sub-control unit.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to transmit a control command to the sub-control means efficiently with a small storage capacity in the main control means.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 3 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention was
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
A display device (acquired number display LED 72) controlled by the main control means;
Sub-control means (sub-control board 80) capable of controlling the production based on information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means includes
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
A lottery result number of the lottery means and an operation mode determination table (pressing order instruction number table) that stores information on the operation mode of the stop switch in association with each other;
The main control means includes
In a game in which information on the operation mode of the stop switch is displayed on the display device, information on the operation mode of the stop switch (push order instruction number) is obtained from the operation mode determination table using the lottery result number of the lottery means as an offset value. (FIG. 52) Based on the acquired information, information on the operation mode of the stop switch is transmitted to the sub-control means (steps S58 and S59 in FIG. 41),
In a game in which information on the operation mode of the stop switch is not displayed on the display device, information on the operation mode of the predetermined stop switch (“0”) is transmitted to the sub-control means.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 3 According to the initial invention, it is possible to acquire information on the operation mode of the stop switch and transmit the information to the sub-control means with a small storage capacity. Further, even for a game that does not display information on the operation mode of the stop switch, the processing can be simplified by transmitting predetermined information on the operation mode of the stop switch.

4). Initial invention 4
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 4 Same as the original invention 3.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 4
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
Sub-control means (sub-control board 80) capable of controlling the production based on information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means includes
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
A lottery result number of the lottery means and a production information determination table (production group number table) that stores the production information in association with each other;
The effect information is information that can output an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means, and is information that cannot specify the lottery result of the lottery means,
The main control means can determine the effect information from the effect information determination table using the lottery result number of the lottery means as an offset value (FIG. 54), and transmits the determined effect information to the sub-control means (FIG. 41). Step S59),
The sub-control means controls the output of the effect based on the received effect information.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 4 According to the initial invention, it is possible to determine the production information with a small storage capacity and transmit the information to the sub-control means. Furthermore, since the lottery result of the lottery means cannot be specified from the effect information transmitted to the sub-control means, it is possible to prevent the goto action.

5. Initial invention 5
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 5 Same as the original invention 3.
(B) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 5 (note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention was
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
Sub-control means (sub-control board 80) capable of controlling the production based on information transmitted from the main control means;
A display device (acquired number display LED 72) controlled by the main control means,
The main control means includes
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
An operation mode determination table (pressing order instruction number table) in which the lottery result number of the lottery means and information on the operation mode of the stop switch are stored in association with each other;
A lottery result number of the lottery means and a production information determination table (production group number table) that stores the production information in association with each other;
The effect information is information that can output an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means, and is information that cannot specify the lottery result of the lottery means,
The main control means can determine the effect information from the effect information determination table using the lottery result number of the lottery means as an offset value (FIG. 54), and transmits the determined effect information to the sub-control means (FIG. 41). Step S59),
The sub-control means controls the output of the effect based on the received effect information,
The main control means acquires information on the operation mode of the stop switch from the operation mode determination table based on the lottery result number of the lottery means in a game displaying information on the operation mode of the stop switch (FIG. 52), Based on the acquired information, information on the operation mode of the stop switch is displayed on the display device (FIG. 65).
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 5 According to the initial invention, it is possible to determine the production information with a small storage capacity and transmit the information to the sub-control means. Furthermore, since the lottery result of the lottery means cannot be specified from the effect information transmitted to the sub-control means, it is possible to prevent the goto action.
Further, it is possible to acquire information on the operation mode of the stop switch and display the information with a small storage capacity.
Furthermore, since the information on the operation mode of the stop switch is displayed by the main control means, the gaming machine can be caused to function without notification of the operation mode of the stop switch by the sub-control means.

6). Initial invention 6
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 6 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that manages an AT with main control means.
Conventionally, a slot machine that manages AT (notification game) with a main control means (sub control board) and a slot machine that manages AT with a sub control means (sub control board) are known.
Here, in the former case, it is necessary to generate a control command as to whether or not the current state is AT, and to transmit the control command to the sub-control means (see, for example, JP-A-2014-150881).
However, in the above-described conventional technology, since the storage capacity of the program of the main control means is limited, efficient information processing has been demanded.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to improve the storage capacity of the main control means.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 6 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention was
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
Sub-control means (sub-control board 80) capable of controlling the production based on information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means includes
A first storage means (RWM61) capable of updating information as the game progresses;
A second storage means (ROM 62, command transmission table 1, command transmission table 2) that stores the number of commands to be transmitted to the sub-control means and data for generating a command to be transmitted to the sub-control means;
When the main control means satisfies a predetermined condition,
1) A value indicating a predetermined address of the second storage means (for example, “1D1F” in the case of the command transmission table 1) is stored in the register R1 (HL register),
2) Store the number of commands to be transmitted (for example, “6” in the case of the command transmission table 1) in the register R2 (A register),
The following processes 3) to 5) are repeated until the value stored in the register R2 reaches a specific value. 3) Data for generating a command by adding a predetermined value (“1”) to the register R1. 4) A command is generated from the read data (for example, in the command transmission table 1, the command indicating the operating state is “3215 (H)”) The command is written in a command buffer (“F113” to “F153”) for transmitting the command to the sub-control means. 5) “1” is subtracted from the value stored in the register R2.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 6 According to the initial invention, the storage capacity of the main control means can be improved.

7). Initial invention 7
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 7 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine in which a gaming machine and a testing machine are connected and a testing signal can be transmitted from the gaming machine to the testing machine.
In a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine is known in which a main control unit and a sub-control unit are provided, and a test signal related to a stop execution position signal is transmitted from the sub-control unit to the testing machine (for example, JP-A-2014 2014). -100410).
However, in the conventional technique, since a test signal is transmitted from the sub-control means, there has been a question as to whether the accuracy (transparency) of the ball-out test can be sufficiently secured.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to be able to transmit a test signal that can sufficiently ensure the accuracy (transparency) of the ball test.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 7 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solution is
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
A gaming machine that executes processing for outputting a test signal by the main control means when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
Information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means, and storing means (ROM 62 storing a push order instruction number table) storing information on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
The lottery result of the lottery means includes a lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device numbers “23” to “40”) having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch and an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch. Lottery results (for example, winning and replay condition device numbers “1”, “15”, “48”, etc.)
The main control means includes
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number “15”) among lottery results that do not have an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, and a special game (1BB game) In a game where the special combination (1BB) for transition to (1BB) is not won (the accessory condition device number is “0”), the winning combination is minimized based on the information stored in the storage means Select information ("0, 3, 12, 8") including the operation timing, and execute a process (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal.
In the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number “23”) among the lottery results having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, the lottery result is stored in the storage means. Information including information indicating that the stop switch has an advantageous pressing order corresponding to the lottery result in the game and that the operation timing of the stop switch is an arbitrary operation timing (“N, 127, 127, 127” ( However, “N” is any one of “1” to “6”)), and processing for outputting the information as a test signal (step S56 in FIG. 41) is performed.

The second solution is
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
A gaming machine that executes processing for outputting a test signal by the main control means when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
Information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means, and storing means (ROM 62 storing a push order instruction number table) storing information on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
The lottery result of the lottery means includes a lottery result having an advantageous pushing order of stop switches (for example, condition device numbers “23” to “40”) and a lottery result not having an advantageous pushing order of stop switches. (For example, condition device numbers “1”, “15”, “48”, etc.)
The main control means includes
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number “15”) among lottery results that do not have an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, and a special game (1BB game) In a game that does not store the winning information of the special combination (1BB) for shifting to (the accessory condition device number is “0”), the winning combination is missed based on the information stored in the storage means Select information ("0, 3, 12, 8") including the operation timing to be minimized, and execute a process (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal.
In the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number “23”) among the lottery results having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, the lottery result is stored in the storage means. Information including information indicating that the stop switch has an advantageous pressing order corresponding to the lottery result in the game and that the operation timing of the stop switch is an arbitrary operation timing (“N, 127, 127, 127” ( However, “N” is any one of “1” to “6”)), and processing for outputting the information as a test signal (step S56 in FIG. 41) is performed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 7 According to the initial invention, an appropriate test signal (symbol stop signal) can be directly transmitted from the main control means in accordance with whether or not the special role is won and the lottery result in the game. Therefore, it is possible to transmit a test signal that sufficiently guarantees the accuracy (transparency) of the appearance test.

8). Initial invention 8
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 8 Same as the original invention 7.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 8 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention was
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
A gaming machine that executes processing for outputting a test signal by the main control means when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine that can be transmitted to the outside,
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
Information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means, and storing means (ROM 62 storing the push order instruction number table) storing information of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
When the special combination (1BB) advantageous to the player is won by the lottery means, means for carrying over the winning information of the special combination until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped and displayed (address of RWM 61) A storage device for the accessory condition device number provided in “F040”),
The lottery result of the lottery means includes a lottery result not including the winning combination (for example, winning and replay condition device number “0”) and a lottery result including one or more winning combinations (for example, winning and replay condition device number “ 23 "),
The main control means includes
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined lottery result (winning and replay condition device number “0”) among the lottery results that do not have an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, and the special role is won, and In a game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination can be stopped, the timing includes a stop switch operation timing at which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination can be stopped based on the information stored in the storage means. Information (“0, 19, 18, 17”) is selected from the storage means, and a process for outputting the information as a test signal (step S56 in FIG. 41) is executed.
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number “48”) among the lottery results that do not have an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, and the special role is won. In a game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination cannot be stopped, the information including the operation timing (“0”) that minimizes the missed winning combination based on the information stored in the storage unit. , 3, 12, 8 "), and a process for outputting the information as a test signal (step S56 in FIG. 41) is executed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 8 According to the original invention, in a game won for a special role, an appropriate test signal (design stop signal) is directly transmitted from the main control means in accordance with the lottery result in the game. Therefore, it is possible to transmit a test signal that sufficiently guarantees the accuracy (transparency) of the appearance test.

9. Initial invention 9
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 9 Same as the original invention 7.
(B) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 9 (note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solution is
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
A gaming machine that executes processing for outputting a test signal (design stop signal) by the main control means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the process proceeds to step S56 in FIG. 41),
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
Information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means, and storing means (ROM 62 storing a push order instruction number table) storing information of information on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
The lottery result of the lottery means includes a lottery result not including the winning combination (winning and replay condition device number “0”) and a lottery result including one or more winning combinations (for example, winning and replay condition device number “23”). )
The main control means includes
A first process (main process) based on the first program (FIG. 41) relating to the progress of the game;
A second process (design stop signal set process) based on the second program (FIG. 55) relating to the transmission of the test signal;
During execution of the process based on the first program, an interrupt process (FIG. 64) for executing a process different from the process based on the first program by an interrupt at regular intervals,
At least during execution of the second process based on the second program, the interrupt process is controlled to be prohibited (step S55 in FIG. 41),
In the second process based on the second program,
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number “15”) among lottery results that do not have an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, and a special game (1BB game) In a game that has not won the special role (1BB) for shifting to, information including the operation timing that minimizes the missed winning combination based on information stored in the storage means ("0, 3, 12, 8 ") is selected, and a process for outputting the information as a test signal (step S56 in FIG. 41) is executed.
In the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number “23”) among the lottery results having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, the lottery result is stored in the storage means. Information including information indicating that the stop switch has an advantageous pressing order corresponding to the lottery result in the game and that the operation timing of the stop switch is an arbitrary operation timing (“N, 127, 127, 127” ( However, “N” is any one of “1” to “6”)), and processing for outputting the information as a test signal (step S56 in FIG. 41) is performed.

The second solution is
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
A gaming machine that executes processing for outputting a test signal (design stop signal) by the main control means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the process proceeds to step S56 in FIG. 41),
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
Information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means, and storing means (ROM 62 storing a push order instruction number table) storing information of information on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
The lottery result of the lottery means includes a lottery result not including the winning combination (winning and replay condition device number “0”) and a lottery result including one or more winning combinations (for example, winning and replay condition device number “23”). )
The main control means includes
A first process (main process) based on the first program (FIG. 41) relating to the progress of the game;
A second process (design stop signal set process) based on the second program (FIG. 55) relating to the transmission of the test signal;
During execution of the process based on the first program, an interrupt process (FIG. 64) for executing a process different from the process based on the first program by an interrupt at regular intervals,
At least during execution of the second process based on the second program, the interrupt process is controlled to be prohibited (S55 in FIG. 41),
In the second process based on the second program,
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number “15”) among lottery results that do not have an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, and a special game (1BB game) Based on the information stored in the storage means in a game that does not store the winning information of the special combination (1BB) to be transferred to (the accessory condition device number at the address “F040” of the RWM 61 is “0”) , Select information ("0, 3, 12, 8") that includes the operation timing that minimizes the missed winning combination, and execute the process for outputting the information as a test signal (step S56 in FIG. 41) And
In the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number “23”) among the lottery results having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, the lottery result is stored in the storage means. Information including information indicating that the stop switch has an advantageous pressing order corresponding to the lottery result in the game and that the operation timing of the stop switch is an arbitrary operation timing (“N, 127, 127, 127” ( However, “N” is any one of “1” to “6”)), and processing for outputting the information as a test signal (step S56 in FIG. 41) is performed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 9 According to the initial invention, an appropriate test signal (symbol stop signal) can be directly transmitted from the main control means according to whether or not the special role is won, the lottery result in the game, or the like. As a result, it is possible to transmit a test signal that sufficiently ensures the accuracy (transparency) of the appearance test.
Furthermore, since interruption processing is prohibited during execution of processing for outputting a signal based on the second program, it is possible to prevent a power interruption from occurring during output of a test signal.

10. Initial invention 10
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention 10 Same as the original invention 7.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 10 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solution is
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
A gaming machine that executes processing for outputting a test signal (design stop signal) by the main control means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the process proceeds to step S56 in FIG. 41),
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
Information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means, and storing means (ROM 62 storing a push order instruction number table) storing information of information on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
The lottery result of the lottery means includes a lottery result not including a winning combination (winning and replay condition device number “0”) and a lottery result including one or more winning combinations (for example, winning and replay condition device number “15”). )
The main control means includes
A first process (main process) based on the first program (FIG. 41) relating to the progress of the game;
A second process (design stop signal set process) based on the second program (FIG. 55) relating to the transmission of the test signal;
During execution of the process based on the first program, an interrupt process (FIG. 64) for executing a process different from the process based on the first program by an interrupt at regular intervals,
In the interrupt process, when it is determined that the power is turned off, the power-off process (step S619 in FIG. 64) is executed.
At least during execution of the second process based on the second program, the interrupt process is controlled to be prohibited (S55 in FIG. 41),
In the second process based on the second program,
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number “15”) among lottery results that do not have an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, and a special game (1BB game) In a game that has not won the special role (1BB) for shifting to, information including the operation timing that minimizes the missed winning combination based on information stored in the storage means ("0, 3, 12, 8 ") is selected, and a process for outputting the information as a test signal (step S56 in FIG. 41) is executed.
In the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number “23”) among the lottery results having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, the lottery result is stored in the storage means. Information including information indicating that the stop switch has an advantageous pressing order corresponding to the lottery result in the game and that the operation timing of the stop switch is an arbitrary operation timing (“N, 127, 127, 127” ( However, “N” is any one of “1” to “6”)), and processing for outputting the information as a test signal (step S56 in FIG. 41) is performed.

The second solution is
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game,
A gaming machine that executes a process for outputting a test signal by the main control means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the process proceeds to step S56 in FIG. 41),
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b);
Information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means, and storing means (ROM 62 storing a push order instruction number table) storing information of information on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
The lottery result of the lottery means includes a lottery result not including a winning combination (winning and replay condition device number “0”) and a lottery result including one or more winning combinations (for example, winning and replay condition device number “15”). )
The main control means includes
A first process (main process) based on the first program (FIG. 41) relating to the progress of the game;
A second process (design stop signal set process) based on the second program (FIG. 55) relating to the transmission of the test signal;
During execution of the process based on the first program, an interrupt process (FIG. 64) for executing a process different from the process based on the first program by an interrupt at regular intervals,
In the interrupt process, when it is determined that the power is turned off, the power-off process (step S619 in FIG. 64) is executed.
At least during execution of the second process based on the second program, the interrupt process is controlled to be prohibited (S55 in FIG. 41),
In the second process based on the second program,
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number “15”) among lottery results that do not have an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, and a special game (1BB game) Based on the information stored in the storage means in a game that does not store the winning information of the special combination (1BB) to be transferred to (the accessory condition device number at the address “F040” of the RWM 61 is “0”) , Select information ("0, 3, 12, 8") that includes the operation timing that minimizes the missed winning combination, and execute the process for outputting the information as a test signal (step S56 in FIG. 41) And
In the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number “23”) among the lottery results having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, the lottery result is stored in the storage means. Information including information indicating that the stop switch has an advantageous pressing order corresponding to the lottery result in the game and that the operation timing of the stop switch is an arbitrary operation timing (“N, 127, 127, 127” ( However, “N” is any one of “1” to “6”)), and processing for outputting the information as a test signal (step S56 in FIG. 41) is performed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 10 Same as Initial Invention 9.

11. Initial invention 11
(A) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as the original invention 6.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of the Initial Invention 11 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solving means (second embodiment)
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
Sub-control means (sub-control board 80) capable of controlling the production based on information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means can update information as the game progresses, and includes storage means (RWM61) having a plurality of addresses.
When the main control means satisfies a predetermined condition (when sending a control command),
1) A value indicating a predetermined address (for example, (A) in FIG. 72, “B6 (H)”) among the addresses of the storage means is stored in the register R1 (E register),
2) The number of commands to be transmitted (“3” in the example of FIG. 72) is stored in the register R2 (B register) (step S702).
The following processing 3) and 4) are repeated until the value stored in the register R2 reaches a specific value. 3) A command based on the information stored in the address specified by the register R1 is transmitted to the sub-control means. 4) “1” is added to the value stored in the register R1 and “1” is subtracted from the value stored in the register R2. And

The second solving means (second embodiment)
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
Sub-control means (sub-control board 80) capable of controlling the production based on information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means can update information as the game progresses, and includes storage means (RWM61) having a plurality of addresses.
When the main control means satisfies a predetermined condition (when sending a control command),
1) A value indicating a predetermined address (for example, (A) in FIG. 72, “B6 (H)”) among the addresses of the storage means is stored in the register R1 (E register),
2) Store the number of commands to be transmitted (“3” in the example of FIG. 72) in the register R2 (B register),
The following processing 3) and 4) are repeated until the value stored in the register R2 reaches a specific value. 3) A command based on the information stored in the address specified by the register R1 is transmitted to the sub-control means. 4) “1” is subtracted from the value stored in the register R1, and “1” is subtracted from the value stored in the register R2. And

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 11 According to the initial invention, the storage capacity of the main control means can be improved. Furthermore, the control command can be transmitted efficiently without providing a command transmission table.

10 Slot machines (gaming machines)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 11 Display window 16 Door switch 21 Effect lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display apparatus 24 Cross key 25 Push button 30 Symbol display apparatus 31 Reel 32 Motor 35 Medal paying-out apparatus 35a Hopper 35b Sub tank 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Discharge sensor 38 Full sensor 39 Reel Sensor 40a 1 bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 43 Medal insertion slot 43a Passage sensor 44a, 44b Insertion sensor 45 Blocker 46 Settling switch 51 Power switch 52 Setting key switch 53 Setting change / reset switch 54 Setting door switch 60 Main control board (main control means)
61 RWM
62 ROM
63 Main CPU
63a Setting change means 63b Condition device lottery means 63c Winning flag control means 63d AT lottery means 63e Push order instruction number selection means 63f Production group number selection means 63g Reel control means 63h Prize determination means 63i Payout means 63j RT control means 63k Main game state Control means 64 Set value display LED
70 Display board 71 Storage number display LED
72 Acquisition number display LED
73 Status display LED
73a Replay display LED
73b LED indicating that it can be inserted
73c Checkout LED
73d Game start LED
73e Single-load indicator LED
73f Two-sheet loading display LED
73g Three-sheet loading indicator LED
80 Sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 RWM
82 ROM
83 Sub CPU
83a Production output control means 100 External concentration terminal board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising main control means having storage means for storing a program,
The storage means is at least
A lottery program to get lottery results;
Stores a test signal program for outputting test signals, and
As a result obtained by execution of the lottery program, the first specific lottery result, the second specific lottery result, and a special lottery result including at least winning of a special role that can carry the winning information to the next game,
In the game that is the result of the first specific lottery, when the stop switch is operated in the first pressing order, the symbol combination that can give the predetermined profit can be stopped and displayed, and the stop switch is operated in the second pressing order. In such a case, the symbol combination that can give the predetermined profit is not stopped and displayed.
In the game that is the result of the second specific lottery, when the stop switch is operated in the second push order, the symbol combination that can give the predetermined profit can be stopped and displayed, and the stop switch is turned on in the first push order. When it is operated, the symbol combination that can give the predetermined profit is not stopped and displayed.
Wherein Ri Do the first specific lottery result under conditions that do not carry over the winning information special combination, the game satisfies a condition for notifying the operation mode of the stop switch, by executing the test signal program, first press It is possible to execute processing for outputting order information and information indicating that the operation timing of the stop switch indicates an arbitrary operation timing,
In a game that satisfies the condition for notifying the operation mode of the stop switch in a situation in which the special combination winning information is not carried over, the second specific lottery result is obtained. By executing the test signal program, the second push order information And a process for outputting information indicating that the operation timing of the stop switch indicates an arbitrary operation timing,
In a game that does not satisfy the condition for notifying the operation mode of the stop switch in the situation where the winning information of the special role is not carried over, the first specific lottery result is obtained. It is possible to execute a process for outputting information and information indicating the operation timing of the stop switch indicating the optimal operation timing for each reel,
In a game that does not satisfy the condition for notifying the operation mode of the stop switch in the situation where the winning information of the special role is not carried over, the second specific lottery result is obtained. A game machine characterized in that it can execute a process for outputting information and information indicating an operation timing of a stop switch indicating an optimum operation timing for each reel.

Images